You are on page 1of 410

Agilent 3070 / 79000 Board Test

Systems
Site Preparation
June 2002
Site Preparation – Legal Notices
03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter ■ Notice, 1 Notice
■ U.S. Government Restricted Rights, 1 This manual is provided “as is” and is subject to change
■ Radiated Immunity, 2 without notice.
■ Overvoltage Category, 2 AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES, INC. MAKES NO
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO
■ Pollution Degree for Agilent 3070 / 79000 Systems, 2
THIS MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
■ Insulation Rating for Wires Connected to Agilent 3070 TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
/ 79000 Systems, 2 NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Agilent
■ Acoustic Level for Agilent 3070 / 79000 Systems, 2
shall not be liable for errors contained herein, nor for
■ Acknowledgements, 2 direct, indirect, general, special, incidental or
■ 3070 Series I DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY consequential damages in connection with the
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014, 3 furnishing, performance, or use of this material.

■ 3070 Series II DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY


U.S. Government Restricted Rights
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014, 4
The Software and Documentation have been developed
■ 3070 Series 3 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
entirely at private expense. They are delivered and
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014, 5
licensed as “commercial computer software” as defined
■ 79000 / xDSL DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY in DFARS 252.227-7013 (Oct 1988), DFARS
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014, 6 252.211-7015 (May 1991) or DFARS 252.227-7014
■ Emergency Shutdown, 7 (Jun 1995), as a “commercial item” as defined in FAR
2.101(a), or as “Restricted computer software” as
■ Warranty, 8 defined in FAR 52.227-19 (Jun 1987) (or any equivalent
■ User Safety Symbols, 9 agency regulation or contract clause), whichever is
applicable. You have only those rights provided for such
■ Safety Symbols, 10
Software and Documentation by the applicable FAR or
■ Warnings, 11 DFARS clause or the Agilent standard software
agreement for the product involved.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1


:

Radiated Immunity Acknowledgements


When subjected to high RFI fields (greater than 1 V/m), The XWD i/o and GIF output routines are derived from
reduced performance may be experienced when making Jef Poskanzer’s PBMplus package:
low-level analog measurements. © Copyright by Jef Poskanzer 1989
HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard
Overvoltage Category Company.
AC Power Overvoltage Category: CAT III

Pollution Degree for Agilent 3070 / 79000


Systems
Pollution Degree 2

Insulation Rating for Wires Connected to Agilent


3070 / 79000 Systems
Use only external wiring with insulation rated for the
maximum voltage (Vrms, Vpk or Vdc) and temperature
to which the wire may be subjected in a fault condition.
Example: The system is connected to a source whose
output is set for 50 Vrms. The source could be set for as
high as 300 Vrms, intentionally or unintentionally.
Therefore, the external wiring connected between this
source and the system must be rated for 300 Vrms.

Acoustic Level for Agilent 3070 / 79000 Systems


LpA = 69dB
am Arbeitsplatz (operator’s position)
normaler Betrieb nach EN27779: 1991

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2


:

3070 Series I DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014


Manufacturer’s Name: Agilent Technologies, Inc.
Manufacturing Test Division
Manufacturer’s Address: 815 14th Street S.W.
Loveland, Colorado 80537
Declares that the Product Name: 3070 (Series I) Board Test Systems
Model Numbers: 3070
Product Options: All
Conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety: IEC 348:1978/HD 401 S1:1981
CSA 556B
UL 1244
Safety qualification performed August 1987
EMC: CISPR 11:1990/EN55011 (1991): Group 1, Class A
IEC 801-2:1991/EN50082-1 (1992): 4kV CD, 8kV AD
IEC 801-3:1984/EN50082-1 (1992): 3V/m
IEC 801-4:1988/EN50082-1 (1992): 1kV Power Line, 0.5kV Signal Lines
Attestation is provided according to article 10 (2) of the Directive by a Technical Contruction File.
Technical File Number: 97-0900-010-TCF Rev: A Dated: 25 February, 1997
Supplementary Information: This product also herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC and the
protection requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (inclusive 93/68/EEC) and carries the "CE" mark accordingly.
A Technical Report/Certificate was issued in accordance with Part V (Reg 50) of the UK Regulations (SI 1992 No. 2372) by a UK-appointed
Competent Body, namely,
Design to Distribution Limited
Westfields House, West Avenue
Kidsgrove, Stoke-on-Trent
Staffordshire, ST7 1TL United Kingdom
Certificate Number: D2D/EMC/CC/007/97 Dated: 10 March, 1997
March 25, 1997
For further information contact your local Agilent Sales and Service office.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3


:

3070 Series II DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014


Manufacturer’s Name: Agilent Technologies, Inc.
Manufacturing Test Division
Manufacturer’s Address: 815 14th Street S.W.
Loveland, Colorado 80537
Declares that the Product Name: 3070 Series II Board Test Systems
Model Numbers: 3070, 72, 73, 75, 79 and 3170, 72, 73, 75, 79 and 3272, 73, 75, 79
Product Options: All
Conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety: IEC 1010-1 (1990) Incl. Amend 1 (1992)/EN61010-1 (1993)
CSA C22.2 #1010.1 (1992)
UL 1244
EMC: CISPR 11:1990/EN55011 (1991): Group 1, Class A
IEC 801-2:1991/EN50082-1 (1992): 4kV CD, 8kV AD
IEC 801-3:1984/EN50082-1 (1992): 3V/m
IEC 801-4:1988/EN50082-1 (1992): 1kV Power Line, 0.5kV Signal Lines
Attestation is provided according to article 10 (2) of the Directive by a Technical Contruction File.
Technical File Number: 95-0900-001-TCF Rev: A Dated: 31 March, 1995
Supplementary Information: This product also herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC and the EMC
Directive 89/336/EEC (inclusive 93/68/EEC) and carries the "CE" mark accordingly.
A Technical Report/Certificate has been issued in accordance with Part V (Reg 50) of the UK Regulations (SI 1992 No. 2372) by a UK-appointed
Competent Body, namely,
Interference Technology International Limited
41-42 Shrivenham Hundred Business Park
Shrivenham, Swindon, Wilts. SN6 8TZ
England, UK
Certificate Number: ITI/0084/UK Dated: 11 April, 1995
April 20, 1995
For further information contact your local Agilent Sales and Service office.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4


:

3070 Series 3 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014


Manufacturer’s Name: Agilent Technologies, Inc.
Manufacturing Test Division
Manufacturer’s Address: 815 14th Street S.W.
Loveland, Colorado 80537
Declares that the Product Name: 3070 Series 3 Board Test Systems
Model Numbers: 3070, 2, 3, 5, 9 and 3170, 2
Product Options: All
Conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety: IEC 1010-1 (1990) Incl. Amend 1 (1992) + Amend 2 (1995)/EN61010-1 (1993) + A2 (1995)
CSA C22.2 #1010.1 (1992)
UL 3111
EMC: CISPR 11:1990/EN55011 (1991): Group 1, Class A
EN50082-1:1992
IEC 1000-4-2:1995: 4kV CD, 8kV AD
IEC 1000-4-3:1995: 3V/m
IEC 1000-4-4:1995: 1kV Power Line, 0.5kV Signal Lines
Attestation is provided according to article 10 (2) of the Directive by a Technical Contruction File.
Technical File Number: 97-0900-030-TCF Rev: A Dated: 12 February, 1998
Supplementary Information: This product also herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC (inclusive 93/68/EEC), and
with the requirements of the Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC (inclusive 93/68/EEC), and with the protection requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and
carries the "CE" mark accordingly. (Note: Compliance with the Machinery Directive requires equipment installation to be performed in accordance with the
Agilent Application Note, "Compliance with the Machinery Directive requires specific installation procedure.") A Technical Report/Certificate has been issued in
accordance with Part V (Reg 50) of the UK Regulations (SI 1992 No. 2372) by a UK-appointed Competent Body, namely,
Celestica Limited
Westfields House, West Avenue
Kidsgrove, Stoke-on-Trent
Staffordshire, ST7 1TL United Kingdom
Certificate Number: TCR/98/023 Dated: 20 March, 1998
May 1, 1998
For further information contact your local Agilent Sales and Service office.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 5


:

79000 / xDSL DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014


Manufacturer’s Name: Agilent Technologies, Inc.
Manufacturing Test Division
Manufacturer’s Address: 815 14th Street S.W.
Loveland, Colorado 80537
Declares that the Product Name: 79000 Series Functional Test Systems
Model Numbers: E2195A, E2196A, E2190A
Product Options: All
Conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety: IEC 61010-1 (1990) + A2:1995/EN61010-1:1993 + A2:1995
CSA C22.2 #1010.1:1992
UL 3111-1
EMC: CISPR 11:1990/EN55011 (1991): Group 1, Class A
EN50082-1:1992
IEC 61000-4-2:1995/: 4kV CD
IEC 61000-4-3:1995/: 3V/m
IEC 61000-4-4:1995/: 1kV Power Line
Attestation is provided according to article 10 (2) of the Directive by a Technical Contruction File.
Technical File Number: 99-0900-001-TCF Rev: A Dated: 5 February, 1999
Supplementary Information: This product also herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC (inclusive
93/68/EEC), and with the requirements of the Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC (inclusive 93/68/EEC), and with the protection requirements of the
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and carries the "CE" mark accordingly. A Technical Report/Certificate was issued in accordance with Part V (Reg 50)
of the UK Regulations (SI 1992 No. 2372) by a UK-appointed Competent Body, namely,
Celestica Limited
Westfields House, West Avenue
Kidsgrove, Stoke-on-Trent
Staffordshire, ST7 1TL United Kingdom
Certificate Number: CC/KID/009/99 Dated: 22 February, 1999
February 26, 1999
For further information contact your local Agilent Sales and Service office.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6


:

Emergency Shutdown
Emergency Shutdown
Switch (EMO)

The Emergency Shutdown Switch, (or Emergency Off,


EMO) is the large red button located at the lower left
corner on the front of the testhead. It turns off all ac and
dc power to the testhead, and is equivalent to turning off
the PDU on the rear of the pod. Press the Emergency
Shutdown Switch if you need to power down the
testhead and its associated equipment in an emergency.

DO NOT use the Emergency Shutdown Switch as a


substitute for correct power-down (unboot) procedures
i.e., executing the testhead power off command.

To restore power after pressing the Emergency


Shutdown Switch, switch the PDU Off for 15 seconds
and then On again.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7


:

Warranty operation outside the published environmental specifications


for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or
maintenance.
Agilent 3070 / 79000 BOARD TEST SYSTEMS 1-YEAR
7. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE
1. Agilent warrants Agilent hardware, accessories and
ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO
supplies against defects in materials and workmanship for the
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER
period of one year. If Agilent receives notice of such defects
WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND
during the warranty period, Agilent will, at its option, either
AGILENT SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
repair or replace products which prove to be defective.
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
Replacement products may be either new or like-new.
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND
2. Agilent warrants that Agilent software will not fail to FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
execute its programming instructions, for the period of one
8. Agilent will be liable for damage to tangible property per
year, due to defects in material or workmanship when
incident up to the greater of $300,000 or the actual amount
properly installed and used. If Agilent receives notice of
paid for the product that is the subject of the claim, and for
defects during the warranty period, Agilent will replace
damages for bodily injury or death, to the extent that all such
software media which does not execute its programming
damages are determined by a court of competent jurisdiction
instructions due to such defects.
to have been directly caused by a defective Agilent Product.
3. Agilent does not warrant that the operation of Agilent
9. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE
products will be uninterrupted or error free. If Agilent is
REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE
unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any
CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES.
product to a condition as warranted, customer will be entitled
EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL
to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the
AGILENT OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS
product to Agilent.
OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
4. Agilent products may contain remanufactured parts CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR
equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN
to incidental use. CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA
5. The warranty period begins on the date of delivery or on
AND NEW ZEALAND: THE WARRANTY TERMS
the date of installation if installed by Agilent. If customer
CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE
schedules or delays Agilent installation more than 30 days
EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT
after delivery, warranty begins on the 31st day from delivery.
EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN
6. Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY
improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS
software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by PRODUCT TO YOU.
Agilent, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8


:

User Safety Symbols


These symbols are used on labels on various places on
the testhead.

WARNING — Do not operate the testhead if you can see this


symbol. It means that hazards exist because the safety shroud

! is not installed. These hazards include pinched fingers from


pulling down a test fixture and electrical shock if Agilent
Performance Port is installed.

WARNING — Keep your hands away from the indicated


areas of the testhead to avoid pinched fingers when rotating the
testhead.

55- WARNING — Do not rotate the testhead past 65 degrees with


! a fixture installed, or the fixture could fall off the testhead,
50- causing personal injury.

65-

CAUTION - ESD — Devices sensitive to electrostatic


discharge may be present. Follow approved ESD-safe handling
practices while working with this equipment.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9


:

Safety Symbols refer to the manual for specific information to avoid


personal injury or damage to the product.
These symbols are used on labels on the product and in
the documentation. They indicate that the user must

! Hazard (see WARNING and CAUTION below). Hazardous voltage.

Alternating current (ac).


Laser product or laser subsystem.
Direct current (dc).

Mains ground terminal. Must be connected to earth Frame or chassis terminal.


ground before operating the equipment. Protects
against electrical shock in case of fault.

Earth ground terminal.

WARNING CAUTION

✺Calls attention to a high-voltage hazard that could


cause bodily injury or death. ✸ Calls attention to a procedure, practice, or
condition that could cause damage to equipment
or permanent loss of data.

WARNING
NOTE
✸ Calls attention to a procedure, practice, or
condition that could cause bodily injury or death. Contains important information.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10


:

Warnings this product have been impaired, either through physical


damage, excessive moisture, or any other reason,
The following general safety precautions must be REMOVE POWER and do not use the product until
observed during all phases of operation, service, and safe operation can be verified by service-trained
repair of this product. Failure to comply with these personnel. If necessary, return the product to an Agilent
precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure
this manual violates safety standards of design, that safety features are maintained.
manufacture, and intended use of this product.
Agilent assumes no liability for the customer’s Do not service or adjust alone: Do not attempt internal
failure to comply with these requirements. service or adjustment unless another person, capable of
rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
Ground the Equipment: For Safety Class I equipment
(equipment having a protective earth terminal), an Do not substitute parts or modify equipment:
uninterruptable safety earth ground must be provided Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards,
from the main power source to the product input wiring do not install substitute parts or perform any
terminals or supplied power cable. unauthorized modification to the product. Return the
product to an Agilent Sales and Service Office for
DO NOT operate the product in an explosive service and repair to ensure that safety features are
atmosphere or in the presence of flammable gases or maintained.
fumes. For continued protection against fire, replace the
line fuse(s) only with the fuse(s) of the same voltage and Ensure Rack Stability: To ensure stability of the test
current rating and type. DO NOT use repaired fuses or bay, place heavier instruments near the bottom of the
short-circuited fuse holders. rack.

Keep away from live circuits: Operating personnel


must not remove equipment covers or shields.
Procedures involving the removal of covers or shields
are for use by service-trained personnel only. Under
certain conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even
with the equipment switched off. To avoid dangerous
electrical shock, DO NOT perform procedures
involving cover or shield removal unless you are
qualified to do so.
DO NOT operate damaged equipment: Whenever it
is possible that the safety protection features built into

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11


Contents Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation
03066-90114 Rev. Z 05/2002
Site Preparation – Legal Notices .....................................................................................................1

1 Site Preparation – Process


The Importance of Site Preparation ............................................................................................. 1-2
Site Prep Manual Description ................................................................................................ 1-2
Responsibilities ........................................................................................................................... 1-3
Agilent ’s Responsibilities ..................................................................................................... 1-3
Customer’s Responsibilities .................................................................................................. 1-3
The Site Preparation Process ....................................................................................................... 1-5
The Site Prep Visit ................................................................................................................. 1-5
Site Planning .......................................................................................................................... 1-5
Site Plan Implementation....................................................................................................... 1-5
Site Verification Visit ............................................................................................................ 1-5
Receiving the System............................................................................................................. 1-5
Site Prep Checklist....................................................................................................................... 1-6

2 Site Preparation – System Overview


System Overview ......................................................................................................................... 2-2
Testhead ................................................................................................................................. 2-9
Controller ............................................................................................................................... 2-9
Test Development Station / Center / Server .......................................................................... 2-9
Support Bay ......................................................................................................................... 2-10
xDSL / POTS Bay................................................................................................................ 2-10

3 Site Preparation – Planning


Choosing The Site........................................................................................................................ 3-2
System-Independent Criteria ................................................................................................. 3-2

© Agilent Techonolgies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation i


Table of Contents

System-Dependent Criteria.................................................................................................... 3-2


The System Plan Drawing ........................................................................................................... 3-3
What To Draw ....................................................................................................................... 3-3
Planning Aids......................................................................................................................... 3-3
Assigning Specialists ................................................................................................................... 3-8
What Are Specialists?............................................................................................................ 3-8
Site Coordinator ..................................................................................................................... 3-8
System Administrator ............................................................................................................ 3-8
Structural Specialist ............................................................................................................... 3-8
Environmental Specialist ....................................................................................................... 3-8
Electrical Specialist................................................................................................................ 3-9
Vacuum Specialist ................................................................................................................. 3-9
Compressed Air Specialist..................................................................................................... 3-9
Communications Specialist.................................................................................................... 3-9
Scheduling Preparations ............................................................................................................ 3-10

4 Site Preparation – Structural Requirements


Floor Requirements...................................................................................................................... 4-2
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 4-2
Anti-Static Surface................................................................................................................. 4-4
Immobilization for the EFS Board Handler........................................................................... 4-5
Moving Access Requirements ..................................................................................................... 4-6
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 4-6
Dimensions of the Crated System.......................................................................................... 4-6
Dimensions of the Uncrated System...................................................................................... 4-8
Ramp Requirements............................................................................................................. 4-11
Hallway and Door Width Requirements.............................................................................. 4-11
Storage Space Requirements ..................................................................................................... 4-12
Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 4-12
Backup Tape Storage ........................................................................................................... 4-12
Documentation Storage........................................................................................................ 4-12

© Agilent Techonolgies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation ii


Table of Contents

Fixture Storage..................................................................................................................... 4-13

5 Site Preparation – Environmental Requirements


Introduction............................................................................................................................ 5-1
Air Quality Requirements ............................................................................................................ 5-2
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 5-2
Corrosive Contaminants ........................................................................................................ 5-2
Particulate Contaminants ....................................................................................................... 5-2
Viscid Contaminants.............................................................................................................. 5-2
Air Temperature Requirements ................................................................................................... 5-3
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 5-3
Air Temperature Specifications ............................................................................................. 5-3
Cooling Requirements ........................................................................................................... 5-4
Humidity Requirements ............................................................................................................... 5-5

6 Site Preparation – Power Requirements


Customer Responsibilities ..................................................................................................... 6-1
How to use this Chapter......................................................................................................... 6-1
Identifying Your System.............................................................................................................. 6-2
About the PDU....................................................................................................................... 6-2
Power Requirements .................................................................................................................... 6-5
Mains Disconnect .................................................................................................................. 6-5
Power Drop ............................................................................................................................ 6-5
Connecting Power to the PDU............................................................................................... 6-8
Is PDU Re-wiring Necessary? ................................................................................................... 6-11
Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 6-11
PDU Wiring Diagrams............................................................................................................... 6-12
327X 1-Module System AC Outlets .................................................................................... 6-15
79000 1-Module System AC Outlets................................................................................... 6-20
317X 2-Module System AC Outlets .................................................................................... 6-24

© Agilent Techonolgies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation iii


Table of Contents

307X 4-Module System AC Outlets .................................................................................... 6-28


E2197A xDSL/POTS Bay AC Outlets ................................................................................ 6-35
Facts about PDUs, MPUs and Power Options........................................................................... 6-41

7 Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements


Introduction............................................................................................................................ 7-1
Compressed Air Requirements .................................................................................................... 7-2
Compressed Air Specifications.............................................................................................. 7-2
Connecting Air to the Testhead ............................................................................................. 7-2
Air Quality ............................................................................................................................. 7-3
Vacuum Requirements................................................................................................................. 7-4
Vacuum System ..................................................................................................................... 7-4
Vacuum Recommendations ................................................................................................... 7-4
Connecting Vacuum to the Testhead ..................................................................................... 7-5
Vacuum Guidelines................................................................................................................ 7-9
Vacuum Examples ................................................................................................................. 7-9
Vacuum Control Assembly.................................................................................................. 7-17
Compressed Air and Vacuum Primer ........................................................................................ 7-19
Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 7-19
Compressed Air ................................................................................................................... 7-19
Vacuum ................................................................................................................................ 7-19

8 Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements


Local Area Network Requirements ............................................................................................. 8-2
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 8-2
Agilent Local Area Network Plan ......................................................................................... 8-2
Sample 3070 Series I Network Scheme................................................................................. 8-2
Agilent 3070 Series II Networking ........................................................................................ 8-5
Agilent 3070 Series 3 / 79000 Networking ........................................................................... 8-7
Gathering Configuration Information for UNIX Startup and Networking................................ 8-10

© Agilent Techonolgies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation iv


Table of Contents

Gathering Configuration Information for MS Windows Networking ....................................... 8-13

9 Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions


Inventory The Shipment .............................................................................................................. 9-2
Uncrating The System ................................................................................................................. 9-3
Uncrating an Agilent 3070 Series I System........................................................................... 9-3
Uncrating an Agilent 3070 Series II/3 and Agilent 79000 System........................................ 9-8
Uncrating Procedure .............................................................................................................. 9-8
Uncrating the Support Bay .................................................................................................. 9-12
Tools Needed to Uncrate the Support Bay: ......................................................................... 9-12
Uncrating Procedure: ........................................................................................................... 9-12
Placing The System ................................................................................................................... 9-15
Moving the Testhead and Support Bay................................................................................ 9-15
Immobilizing and Leveling the System ............................................................................... 9-15
Re-shipping a 3070 and 79000 System...................................................................................... 9-16
Special Option to Part Number Listing................................................................................ 9-17

10 Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems


Introduction................................................................................................................................ 10-2
Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001) ....................................... 10-5
Sizing the Input Wires and Circuit Breakers ....................................................................... 10-5
Series 3 / 79000 Power Distribution .................................................................................... 10-9
327X 1-Module System AC Outlets .................................................................................. 10-17
79000 - 1-Module System AC System .............................................................................. 10-28
317X 2-Module System AC Outlets .................................................................................. 10-39
307X 4-Module 1-PDU System AC Outlets...................................................................... 10-50
307X 4-Module 2-PDU System AC Outlets...................................................................... 10-60
E2195/E2197A xDSL/POTS Bay AC Outlets................................................................... 10-67
Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000) ..................................... 10-78
Introduction........................................................................................................................ 10-78

© Agilent Techonolgies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation v


Table of Contents

Series 3 / 79000 Power Requirements ............................................................................... 10-80


Power Recommentations ................................................................................................... 10-82
Sizing The Input Wires And Circuit Breakers................................................................... 10-89
Connecting Power To The Testhead.................................................................................. 10-90
“Mains” Wiring Diagrams ............................................................................................... 10-101
220/380–240/415 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (0E5, 05L, 0E7) ................................... 10-102
220/380–240/415 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral (05B, 05G, 05K).......................... 10-102
120/208–127/220 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (AWW, 05E) ....................................... 10-103
120/208–127/220 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral (AWV, AWZ) ............................. 10-104
200-240 3-phase Delta (0ED, 05C, 05H, 0E6) ................................................................ 10-105
100/200-120/240 V Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral (AWY, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH)............ 10-106
220–240 V Single-Phase Earthed (05M, 05F, 05J) ......................................................... 10-107
200–240 V Single-Phase Non-Earthed (AWX, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC)..................................... 10-108
Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II) ............................................................................... 10-109
Identifying the PDU/PDK Type ...................................................................................... 10-109
Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU........................................................................ 10-112
44964A/B PDU Electrical Requirements ........................................................................ 10-113
E1099A PDU Electrical Requirements............................................................................ 10-114
E1170-80003 PDK Electrical Requirements ................................................................... 10-124
E1131A PDU Electrical Requirements............................................................................ 10-125
Agilent 3070 Series II / 3 - E1135A/B Power Distribution Units ................................... 10-128
Connecting Mains Power To The System ............................................................................. 10-143
Introduction...................................................................................................................... 10-143
44964A/B AC Mains Connection.................................................................................... 10-144
E1099A AC Mains Connection ....................................................................................... 10-145
Connecting Power to the E1170-80003 PDK .................................................................. 10-146
Connecting Power to the E1131A PDU .......................................................................... 10-150
Connecting Power to the E1135A/B PDU....................................................................... 10-157

11 Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion


Introduction................................................................................................................................ 11-2
Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 11-2

© Agilent Techonolgies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation vi


Table of Contents

Who Should do the Current Reduction Conversion?........................................................... 11-3


What to Do in Case of Difficulty......................................................................................... 11-3
Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure ................................................................... 11-4
Current Reduction Conversion Preview .............................................................................. 11-4
Schedule the Conversion ..................................................................................................... 11-5
Determine the System Type and Power Option................................................................... 11-5
Shut Down the System......................................................................................................... 11-8
Set the DUT Power Supply’s Input Voltage........................................................................ 11-9
Agilent 6621A and 6624A Line Voltage Settings ............................................................... 11-9
Agilent 6634A Line Voltage Settings................................................................................ 11-15
6634B Line Voltage Settings ............................................................................................. 11-17
Agilent 6642A Line Voltage Settings................................................................................ 11-18
Rewire the Inputs to the Outlets ........................................................................................ 11-20
327X 1-Module System AC Outlets .................................................................................. 11-29
79000 1-Module System AC Outlets................................................................................. 11-40
317X 2-Module System AC Outlets .................................................................................. 11-51
307X 4-Module 1-PDU System AC Outlets...................................................................... 11-62
307X 4-Module 2-PDU System AC Outlets...................................................................... 11-72
E1085 POTS Bay and E2195 xDSL Bay AC Outlets ....................................................... 11-79
Reconnect the Loads .......................................................................................................... 11-84
Verify the System .............................................................................................................. 11-84
Complete the Conversion................................................................................................... 11-84
Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU.......................................................................... 11-84

© Agilent Techonolgies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation vii


1 Site Preparation – Process
03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... ■ The Importance of Site Preparation, 1-2

■ Responsibilities, 1-3

■ The Site Preparation Process, 1-5

■ Site Prep Checklist, 1-6

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1-1


Chapter 1: Site Preparation – Process: The Importance of Site Preparation

The Importance of The Agilent 3070 / 79000 family of board test systems ■ Chapter 5, Site Preparation – Environmental
includes complex and sophisticated automatic test Requirements describes air quality, temperature,
Site Preparation equipment. To ensure that your site is properly equipped humidity, and electromagnetic shielding
for your new system, and to minimize the possibility of requirements.
problems or delays in system installation, you must
■ Chapter 6, Site Preparation – Power
consider many things during site preparation. Before
Requirements describes, for Series 3 systems,
calling your local Agilent representative to install your
power requirements for the various parts of the
system, read and follow the recommendations provided
system and mains power connections.
in this manual.
■ Chapter 7, Site Preparation – Compressed Air
Site Prep Manual Description and Vacuum Requirements describes the
compressed air and vacuum that the system
This manual contains the following chapters: requires.
■ Chapter 1, Site Preparation – Process (this ■ Chapter 8, Site Preparation – Communications
chapter) discusses your responsibilities, lists Cabling Requirements describes the Local Area
Agilent ’s responsibilities, and provides a Network requirements.
checklist to use as you proceed.
■ Chapter 9, Site Preparation – Receiving and
■ Chapter 2, Site Preparation – System Overview Moving Instructions describes the uncrating,
describes the system at an overview level and handling, and re-shipping process for a 327X /
defines terms you will encounter as you prepare 79000 test system.
your site.
■ Chapter 10, Site Preparation – Power
■ Chapter 3, Site Preparation – Planning discusses Requirements for Older Systems describes the
choosing a site for your system, designing your power requirements for 3070 / 79000 systems
site layout, assigning people to do various using older power distribution units.
preparation tasks, and scheduling your
preparations. ■ Chapter 11, Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000
Current Reduction Conversion describes how to
■ Chapter 4, Site Preparation – Structural reconfigure the power subsystem of an Agilent
Requirements describes floor, access, and 3070 Series 3 or 79000 which was shipped prior
storage requirements. to June 1999 to have the same power requirements
as 3070 / 79000 systems shipped after June 1999.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1-2


Chapter 1: Site Preparation – Process: Responsibilities

Responsibilities Successful system preparation and installation requires air and vacuum have been installed, and primary
planning and effort by both you and Agilent. Following power has been run to the system location, an
are summaries of each party’s responsibilities. Agilent representative will complete the system
installation. For systems with the power cord
Agilent ’s Responsibilities pre-installed, the CE will plug in the system after
testing the power. For older systems where the
As a part of the purchase of an Agilent 3070 / 79000 power cord must be installed, the electrician will
family board test system, Agilent will provide the connect the power cord to the system after the CE
following: removes the system from the pallet.
■ SITE PREPARATION SUGGESTIONS To help ■ Installation includes removing the system from
you begin, an Agilent representative will visit you the pallet, unpacking the smaller boxes,
to help you understand what you will need to do to connecting cabling, starting the system,
make your site ready for your system and answer customizing the system software, and performing
any questions you may have. This is called the a complete system verification. system and
"Initial Site Preparation Visit" and the Agilent answer any questions you may have. This is called
CEs will bill up to 2 hours to Agilent the "Installation Visit" and the Agilent CE will bill
Technologies. up to 4 hours to Agilent Technologies.
■ ELECTRICAL and ENVIRONMENTAL ■ WARRANTY The Agilent 3070 / 79000 family
INSPECTION After primary power has been board test systems include a one-year warranty
installed at the site, an Agilent representative will that provides on-site hardware repair, software
inspect the lines to verify that your electrical support and software updates.
power is suitable for the system. At the same time,
the Agilent representative will inspect the site to ■ INSURANCE The system is insured by Agilent
verify that its environmental characteristics until it is delivered to your loading dock.
conform to the site preparation specifications.
system and answer any questions you may have. Customer’s Responsibilities
This is called the "Verifying Site Preparation
While you are primarily responsible for these activities,
Visit" and the Agilent CEs will bill up to 2 hours
you can ask the Agilent representative for advice and
to Agilent Technologies.
information about services offered.
■ INSTALLATION After all components of the
system have been moved to the site, compressed

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1-3


Chapter 1: Site Preparation – Process: Responsibilities

■ INSURANCE You must provide insurance ■ MOVING Moving the equipment from the
coverage for your system from the time it is receiving dock to the installation site is the
delivered to your facility. customers responsibility. The system should be
moved, after the tri-wall box is removed, to an
■ SOFTWARE SUPPORT CONTRACTS You are
area safe from damage or misplaced boxes.
responsible for initiating and renewing support
contracts for software, documentation updates, ■ WIRING AND CABLING Wiring primary power
and telephone support. Software support and to the system is your responsibility, as is installing
updates are included during the warranty period. communications cabling to the system. The actual
power connection to the system will be made after
■ SITE PREPARATION AND MAINTENANCE
the CE has removed the system from the pallet
You must supply all labor and materials used in
and moved it to the desired location.
site construction and maintenance. You are also
responsible for obtaining any building permits and
licenses required by local laws and regulations.
■ PROPER USE OF THE SYSTEM You are
responsible for ensuring that use of the system is
consistent with local laws and regulations.
■ UNCRATING You should remove the tri-wall box
from the testhead,1 but not remove the system
from the pallet. The Agilent representative will
remove the testhead from the pallet. You may
inventory the shipment using the enclosed
packing list. You may leave the smaller boxes for
the Agilent representative to unpack when the
system is installed.
■ INSPECTION You must inspect the system for
physical damage. If you believe that your system
was damaged in shipment, call your Agilent
representative.

1 It will be difficult to remove the tri-wall box in a room with less than 2.5 meters (8 foot) clearance.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1-4


Chapter 1: Site Preparation – Process: The Site Preparation Process

The Site This section describes the steps of the Agilent 3070 / Site Verification Visit
79000 family system site preparation process.
Preparation The site verification visit allows the Agilent
Process The Site Prep Visit representative to review your preparations and answer
any remaining questions. The Agilent representative
An Agilent representative will come to your site to will check your power to verify that it is suitable for the
discuss what you will need to do to make your site ready system. The Agilent representative will also check your
for your system. During this visit, the Agilent compressed air and vacuum hookups.
representative will review this manual and answer any
questions you may have. This will help you get started Receiving the System
preparing your site.
When the system arrives at your site, remove the tri-wall
box from the testhead, but do not remove the system
Site Planning
from the pallet. The Agilent representative will remove
The site planning step is crucial! A little effort invested the testhead from the pallet. You may inventory the
in understanding and planning your system will save shipment using the enclosed packing list. You may leave
much effort at installation time. Plan your system area the smaller boxes for the Agilent representative to
using Chapter 3 of this manual. Use Chapters 2 through unpack when the system is installed. You should move
9 to understand details as you plan. Assign “specialists.” the system to the site where it will be installed, or a safe
Specialists are the people who will do various tasks. storage area.
Make a “system plan drawing” that you and the Agilent
representative can use to install your system. If you need
help, call your Agilent representative. Schedule all site
preparation activities.

Site Plan Implementation


Implement the plan. Use Chapters 4 through 11 and the
system plan drawing. Work with your specialists.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1-5


Chapter 1: Site Preparation – Process: Site Prep Checklist

Site Prep Checklist Use this checklist to check off each task as you complete
it.

Table 1-1 Site preparation checklist

Task Checklist
Chapter 3, Site Preparation – [ ] Location chosen?
Planning Specialists assigned?
Site Coordinator:______________________________________________________
System Administrator:_________________________________________________
Structural Specialist:___________________________________________________
Environmental Specialist:_______________________________________________
Electrical Specialist:___________________________________________________
Vacuum Specialist:____________________________________________________
Compressed Air Specialist:_____________________________________________
Communications Specialist:_____________________________________________
[ ] Schedule Created:
[ ] Board Handler Involvement (44990A EFS Board Handler Manual)
Chapter 4, Site Preparation – [ ] Floor suitable?
Structural Requirements [ ] Room to move the big box? If not, do your have a place to unpack it?
[ ] Storage sufficient?

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1-6


Chapter 1: Site Preparation – Process: Site Prep Checklist

Table 1-1 Site preparation checklist (continued)

Task Checklist
Chapter 5, Site Preparation – [ ] Air quality suitable?
Environmental Requirements [ ] Ambient temperature suitable?
[ ] Cooling sufficient?
[ ] Humidity suitable?
[ ] Electromagnetic environment suitable?
Chapter 6, Site Preparation – System Power
Power Requirements
What power option is your system? Opt. ______
[ ] AC mains power verified?
[ ] Mains disconnect1 installed if the system does not have an E1135C PDU?
[ ] Do you need to install power conditioning equipment?
[ ] Do you need to install a new transformer?
[ ] What system drop wire size is required? Wire Size ______
[ ] What system drop breaker size is required? Breaker Size ______
[ ] Power cable installed for mains?
Connect Mains Power
[ ] Power installed to system?
Convenience Outlet Power
[ ] Testhead strip printer?
[ ] Testhead server?

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1-7


Chapter 1: Site Preparation – Process: Site Prep Checklist

Table 1-1 Site preparation checklist (continued)

Task Checklist
Chapter 7, Site Preparation – [ ] Compressed air line installed?
Compressed Air and Vacuum [ ] Vacuum plan done?
Requirements
[ ] How many solenoids needed? _____
[ ] Vacuum equipment installed?
Chapter 8, Site Preparation – [ ] Local area network planned?
Communications Cabling [ ] LAN cabling installed?
Requirements

NOTE
The remaining items go beyond site preparation, but must be completed before installation. See the System and
Support Bay Uncrating Instructions (p/n’s E4000-90013 and E4000-90014 for a Series 3 system) attached to the ramp
of the shipping pallet and Chapter 9, Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions for further information.
Chapter 9, Site Preparation – [ ] Insurance coverage arranged for arrival?
Receiving and Moving [ ] System inspected for physical damage?
Instructions
[ ] Shipment inventoried?
[ ] Equipment moved to installation site?
[ ] Testhead unpacked (Tri-wall box removed, but not removed from the pallet.). The
Agilent service representative will unpack the smaller boxes and move the system as
part of installation.
1. See Chapter 6, Site Preparation – Power Requirements for more information.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1-8


2 Site Preparation – System Overview
03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... ■ System Overview, 2-2

This chapter presents information that will help you


understand the parts of the 3070 Series I, II, 3 and 79000
families of board test systems. There are no tasks
presented in this chapter.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-1


Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview

System Overview The Agilent 3070 / 79000 family systems must include The 3070 Series 3 systems are shorter in length than the
a testhead and a controller. In addition, the 307X Series II, has a choice of two faster HP-UX controllers,
systems include a support bay and either type of system has new covers with new colors, uses a flat panel
may include a POTS bay, a Quick Verify functional test display and optionally have vacuum valves mounted in
bay, test development centers, test development stations, the testhead. The controller is moved to the right pod
and peripherals. The testhead and support bay will with the Power Distribution Unit (PDU) and the left pod
require the greatest site preparation effort. is eliminated.
Figure 2-1 on page 2-3 shows a 307X Series I system Figure 2-5 on page 2-7 shows a 3070PC Series 3
with a control bay. It includes a 4-module (maximum) system. The right pod is slightly larger to make room for
testhead and a support bay. the Visualize P-Class PC which utilizes the Windows
NT operating system.
Figure 2-2 on page 2-4 shows a 317X Series I system. It
includes a 2-module (maximum) testhead and no Figure 2-6 on page 2-8 shows an Agilent 79000
support bay or control bay. Functional Test Systemis which is a one-module test
system with an E1421A 6-slot VXI mainframe in the
Figure 2-3 on page 2-5 shows a 307X Series II system.
second module position. The DUT power supplies are
It includes a 4-module (maximum) testhead with a
moved to the pod on the left end of the cradle.
support bay. The 317X Series II system (not shown)
looks the same as the 307X Series II, but does not have a
support bay. The 327X (not shown) is a physically
smaller version of the 307X Series II, having only one
module.
The main difference between the 3070 Series I and the
3070 Series II systems is the latter has twice the test pin
capability, and in the Series II the controller is mounted
in the testhead pod. The Series II systems also have
redesigned testheads which include space for more
equipment.
Figure 2-4 on page 2-6 shows a 3070 Series 3 system
which uses an HP-UX controller.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-2


Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview

Figure 2-1 307X Series I system

Support Bay

Testhead

Control Bay

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-3


Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview

Figure 2-2 317X Series I system

Testhead

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-4


Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview

Figure 2-3 3070 Series II system


L

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-5


Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview

Figure 2-4 3070 Series 3 system with HP-UX controller and an optional external support bay

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-6


Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview

Figure 2-5 3070PC Series 3 system using a Windows controller

88.4 mm (3.5 in)


Wider Pod

pc-sys.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-7


Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview

Figure 2-6 79000 (E2190A) Functional Test System

Performance Ports

DUT Power
Supplies VXI Mainframe

3070 Module

Controller

79000d.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-8


Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview

Testhead Site preparation for the controller hardware is minimal


and is identical to that of a general-purpose computer of
The testhead connects to the device under test (DUT). the same type. Voltage and current requirements vary
The measurement hardware is installed in card cages with location but must be considered during site
called “modules.” A 307X system can have up to four preparation. Planning your LAN and routing LAN
modules. A 317X system can have up to two modules. cabling is important for site preparation. In order to use
A 327X has only one module. Vacuum and compressed remote support, you will need to provide a suitable
air are both used to bring the DUT into contact with the telephone line.
measurement hardware: compressed air brings the
fixture into contact with the interface pins in the Test Development Station / Center / Server
module, and vacuum pulls the DUT down onto the
fixture’s probes. One compressed air fitting and four For 3070 Series I systems, test development “stations”
vacuum ports are on a 307X testhead; one compressed (TDSs) are diskless HP 9000 Series-300 controllers set
air fitting and up to two vacuum ports are on a 317X, up as cnodes on the testhead controller. Test
79000 and 327X testhead. development “centers” (TDCs) are also HP 9000
Series-300 controllers, but they are independent (not
The testhead cradle includes two integrated cabinets
cnodes), having their own disks.
called the right pod and the left pod. The testhead’s
power distribution unit (PDU) is located in the right For 3070 Series II systems, “stations” are HP 9000
pod. The testhead’s controller can be in either the right Series-700 (712-60, 712-100, or C110) controllers with
or left pod depending on where the monitor and disks. Most of the 3070 software is mounted using NFS.
keyboard are located (the controller must be in the pod TDCs are no longer cluster servers, but still act as file
closest to the monitor and keyboard). servers for the TDS. TDSs are no longer cnodes; they
are stand-alone systems, although they do have a lot of
Controller board test software that is NFS mounted. If a Series-II
system is added to a site with Series I systems, the two
The controller for the 3070 Series I system is an HP systems can be networked to share resources.
9000 Series-300. The controller for the 3070 Series II
system is an HP 9000 Series-700. The controller for For 3070 Series 3 and 79000 systems using the HP-UX
3070 Series 3 and the 79000 is an HP 9000 Series-700; controller, test development stations and centers have
however the customer has a choice of two models with been replaced by test “servers.” Test servers are
significantly different speed capability. They include functionally similar to the older test development
peripherals and specialized software for board test. The centers but are configured to be more capable of serving
controller for the Series 3 3070PC is a Visualize P-class X-terminals and PC X-terminals. With the upgrade of
using the NT 4.0 operating system.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-9


Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview

B.03.00 software, test development stations and centers xDSL / POTS Bay1
were converted to servers.
The xDSL / POTS (x Digital Subscriber Line) / (Plain
For 3070PC series 3 systems using the Visualize PC Old Telephone Services) Bay can be added to a 3X79
Workstation, program development may be done on the Series I, II, 3 system and to the 79000 system. The
standalone PC workstation and copied to the testhead E2195A xDSL / POTS bay can be ordered with xDSL
controller. Windows NT is not a true multi-user or POTS or both testing capability.
operating system. There is no equivalent to "rlogin" or
"Telnet" in Windows NT.

Support Bay
The support bay is included with 307X systems. There
is no support bay in 317X, 327X or 79000 systems.
In the Series I systems, the support bay contains the
power distribution unit (PDU), module power supplies
(MPUs), DUT power supplies, and optional test
equipment. The PDU receives “mains” ac power and
distributes ac power to the rest of the system. The MPUs
supply dc power to the testhead modules. The DUT
power supplies provide operating power to the device
(board) under test. The support bay does not supply
power to the control bay and peripherals. Mains power
is wired to the support bay as part of the installation
process.
In the 3070 Series II family system, the support bay is
present in 307X systems but not in 317X systems. The
support bay, when present, houses the DUT power
supplies and optional test equipment. If the support bay
is not present, this equipment is in the testhead.
In the Series 3 systems, the support bay contains only
DUT power supplies and optional test equipment.
1 See the Telecom Theory and Repair Manual, 03066-90100, for more information.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-10


3 Site Preparation – Planning
03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... ■ Choosing The Site, 3-2

■ The System Plan Drawing, 3-3

■ Assigning Specialists, 3-8

■ Scheduling Preparations, 3-10

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-1


Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: Choosing The Site

Choosing The Site There are two types of criteria that you should consider
when you choose the location of the 3070 / 79000
family system in your facility: criteria that are
dependent on the system and criteria that are not.

System-Independent Criteria
System-independent criteria are ones that only you can
determine. Examples are shop flow, department
locations, plant security, etc. You will probably use
these criteria to choose a prospective location and then
qualify that location using the system-dependent
criteria.

System-Dependent Criteria
System-dependent criteria come in two categories: those
that are easily modified if needed and those that are not
easily modified. The easy criteria will probably not
disqualify a prospective location, but the difficult
criteria might.
Easier criteria are storage space, ambient temperature,
cooling, electrical power availability, vacuum supply,
compressed air supply, and local area network cabling.
Difficult criteria are air quality, floor strength, ambient
vibrations, and physical access. Use the information
about difficult criteria described in this manual to
qualify prospective locations.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-2


Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: The System Plan Drawing

The System Plan What To Draw side of the testhead as the operator. However, if you
want the monitor and keyboard to be above the testhead,
Drawing Many things need to be done before the 3070 / 79000 you should install them on the opposite side from the
family board test system can be installed. If you make operator. In any case, with the Series II, the controller
an area blueprint (a system plan drawing), you can use it must be installed in the testhead pod closest to the
to plan all aspects of site preparation. A complete monitor and keyboard. It is important to make this
drawing would detail power availability, decision correctly. If you decide to change it after
communications cabling, compressed air and vacuum installation, it will require some work to move the
lines, and system placement with respect to other controller.
equipment. It can also serve to verify physical access.
The figures show the systems with support bays. If your
Planning Aids system does not have a support bay, or includes an
optional extra equipment bay, modify your layout
Use Figure 3-1 through Figure 3-4 to lay out your accordingly. See Chapter 4, Site Preparation –
system on the system plan drawing. Figure 3-1 on Structural Requirements for the exact dimensions of
page 3-4 shows three layout suggestions for 3070 Series individual testheads and support bays.
I system. Figure 3-2 on page 3-5 shows layout
suggestions for a Series I 3X79 Telecom systems with Always allow 1 meter (3 feet) of space behind the
xDLS/POTS (x Digital Subscriber Line)/(Plain Old system so service personnel can access the hardware
Telephone Services) bays. Figure 3-3 on page 3-6 inside the testhead and support bay.
shows three layout suggestions for a 3070 Series II
system. Figure 3-4 on page 3-7 shows three layout
suggestions for a 3070 Series 3 system, including the
3070PC.
Before installing the 3070 / 79000 system you should
determine whether the operator will stand or sit and
whether the operator will work from the right or left side
of the testhead (this is not as important with a 4-module
testhead). These decisions will determine whether the
monitor and keyboard should be on the right or left. If
you want the monitor and keyboard to be in front of the
testhead as shown, you should install them on the same

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-3


Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: The System Plan Drawing

Figure 3-1 Recommended Series I system layouts


.

Right-to-Left Layout Left-to-Right Layout

Support Support
Bay Control Bay
Control
Bay
Bay
Testhead Testhead
9 ft. 9 ft.
(2.7 m) (2.7 m)
Strip
Strip
Printer Monitor &
Monitor & Printer
Keyboard
Keyboard

12 ft. 12 ft.
(3.7 m) (3.7 m)

11 ft.
(3.4 m)

Control
Bay

9 ft.
Conveyor Testhead
(2.7 m)
Support

Strip
Bay

Monitor & Printer


Keyboard
SiteP6.wpg
Left-to-Right Layout
with Board Handler

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-4


Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: The System Plan Drawing

Figure 3-2 Recommended Series I 3X79 telecom system layouts

Right-to-Left Layout Left-to-Right Layout

Support xDSL/ xDSL/ POTS


Bay Control POTS Control Bay
Bay Bay
Testhead 9 ft. Testhead
9 ft. 2.7 m
2.7 m
Strip Strip
Printer Monitor & Printer
Keyboard Keyboard

14 ft. 12 ft.
4.3 m 3.7 m

sitepx.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-5


Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: The System Plan Drawing

Figure 3-3 Recommended 3070 Series II system layouts

Right-to-Left Layout Left-to-Right Layout

Controller
Support

Controller
3 m (9 ft.)
3 m (9 ft.) Testhead Support Bay Testhead
Bay

Strip Printer
Strip Printer Monitor &
Monitor &
Keyboard
Keyboard
3.7 m (12 ft.)
3.7 m (12 ft.)

Support
Bay

3 m (9 ft.)

Controller
Conveyor Board Handler Conveyor

Monitor &
Strip Printer Keyboard

3.7 m (12 ft.)


Left-to-Right Layout 3070-S2.WPG
with Board Handler

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-6


Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: The System Plan Drawing

Figure 3-4 Recommended 3070 Series 3 system layouts

Right-to-Left Layout Left-to-Right Layout

Controller Controller

3 m (9 ft.) Support
3 m (9 ft.) Testhead Support Bay Testhead
Bay

Monitor & Monitor & Strip Printer


Strip Printer Keyboard
Keyboard
3.3 m (11 ft.)
3.3 m (11 ft.)

Support
Bay

3 m (9 ft.)

Controller
Conveyor Board Handler Conveyor

Monitor &
Strip Printer Keyboard

3.3 m (11 ft.)


Left-to-Right Layout 3070-S3.WPG
with Board Handler

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-7


Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: Assigning Specialists

Assigning What Are Specialists? system. Agilent also offers an excellent course in
system administration for HP-UX based systems.
Specialists The concept of "specialists" represents the recognition
that, at most facilities, no one person will do all the The Administering Agilent 3070PC Systems manual
preparatory work. Your specialists may simply plan and describes the NT system administration specific to
add to your system plan drawing, and then have the 3070PC administration; it will arrive with the system. It
installation done by others. You may have several does not describe general Windows NT system
people share one "specialty," or you may have several administration. For general information, refer to the
specialists be the same person. Most importantly, each Windows NT documentation.
aspect of the planning should be the explicit
responsibility of a specialist. Structural Specialist
The structural specialist will verify that the floor is
Site Coordinator suitable for the system in terms of strength and
One person should manage the site preparation process. anti-static properties. This specialist will examine the
In this manual, that person will be called the site route from the receiving area to the system’s proposed
coordinator. location and decide how best to move the system to that
place. Storage will be required after the system is in
Make sure someone has been designated as the site operation, and the structural specialist will decide what
coordinator. The site coordinator will plan the storage is needed. Chapter 4, Site Preparation –
installation, maintain the system plan drawing, and Structural Requirements is the primary reference for
check off the site prep checklist. The site coordinator the structural specialist.
should probably assign all the other specialists.
Environmental Specialist
System Administrator
The environmental specialist will verify that your site’s
Any successful system requires good system environment is suitable for the system. Air quality,
administration. One person should have responsibility ambient temperature, cooling capacity, humidity, and
of the system administration for your 3070 / 79000 electromagnetic interference are areas that the
family system. environmental specialist must address. Chapter 5, Site
The HP-UX System Administrator Manual is a good Preparation – Environmental Requirements contains
tool for your system administrator; it will arrive with the information for this specialist.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-8


Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: Assigning Specialists

Electrical Specialist Communications Cabling Requirements contains


information for this specialist.
Your electrical specialist will plan and install the mains
power for the system, support bay and the convenience
outlets for the other system equipment. These items
should be marked on the system plan drawing. Chapter
6, Site Preparation – Power Requirements contains
the electrical information for Series 3 systems with the
E1135C PDU and Chapter 10, Site Preparation –
Power Requirements for Older Systems for Series I,
II, and Series 3 with the E1135B PDU

Vacuum Specialist
The vacuum specialist will plan and install your
system’s vacuum control system. Vacuum lines should
be marked on the system plan drawing. The information
pertaining to vacuum control is in Chapter 7, Site
Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum
Requirements of this manual.

Compressed Air Specialist


The compressed air specialist will plan and install the
compressed air supply for your system. Air lines should
be marked on the system plan drawing. The compressed
air information is in Chapter 7, Site Preparation –
Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements.

Communications Specialist
The communications specialist will plan your local area
network and install the LAN cables to your system.
LAN cables and telephone lines should be marked on
the system plan drawing. Chapter 8, Site Preparation –

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-9


Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: Scheduling Preparations

Scheduling When the system plan drawing has been made and the
specialists know what to do, make a tentative schedule.
Preparations Use the schedule to balance the work. With this plan,
estimate when the site will be ready for the system.
Make sure that you schedule extra time; if any delays
occur, you can use the extra time to finish preparations.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-10


4 Site Preparation – Structural Requirements
03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... ■ Floor Requirements, 4-2

■ Moving Access Requirements, 4-6

■ Storage Space Requirements, 4-12

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-1


Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Floor Requirements

Floor Requirements This section contains: Introduction


■ Introduction, 4-2 The Agilent 3070 / 79000 family system tester
■ Anti-Static Surface, 4-4 (testhead and Support Bay, if included) is the heaviest
part of the system. The controller, test development
■ Immobilization for the EFS Board Handler, 4-5 centers, and test development stations present no special
load-bearing concern. Table 4-1 shows the approximate
weights of fully-loaded systems.

Table 4-1 System weights

System Type Product Weight


3070 Series I Testhead 370 kg (750 lb)
Support Bay 205 kg (450 lb)
Testhead and Support Bay on Pallet 725 kg (1600 lb)
307X Series I Testhead 454 kg (1000 lb)
Testhead on pallet 526 kg (1160 lb)
Maximum Point Floor Loading (each leg) 275 kg (600 lb)
Support Bay 209 kg (460 lb)
Support Bay on pallet 277 kg (610 lb)
Maximum Point Floor Loading (each leg) 185 kg (400 lb)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-2


Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Floor Requirements

Table 4-1 System weights (continued)

System Type Product Weight


307X, 3070PC Series 3 Testhead 489 kg (1080 lb)
Testhead on pallet 587 kg (1295 lb)
Maximum Point Floor Loading (each leg) 275 kg (600 lb)
Support Bay 209 kg (460 lb)
Support Bay on pallet 277 kg (610 lb)
Maximum Point Floor Loading (each leg) 185 kg (400 lb)
317X Series I Testhead 410 kg (900 lb)
Testhead on pallet 480 kg (1060 lb)
317X Series II Testhead 454 kg (1000 lb)
Testhead on pallet 525 kg (1160 lb)
Maximum floor point loading each leg 275 kg (600 lb)
317X, 3070PC Series 3 Testhead 429 kg (945 lb)
Testhead on pallet 525 kg (1160 lb)
Maximum floor point loading each leg 275 kg (600 lb)
327X Series II Testhead 340 kg (750 lb)
Testhead on pallet 477 kg (1050 lb)
327X, 3070PC Series 3 Testhead 340 kg (750 lb)
Testhead on pallet 477 kg (1050 lb)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-3


Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Floor Requirements

Table 4-1 System weights (continued)

System Type Product Weight


3X79CT 1-Channel 165 kg (365 lb)
POTS Bay off pallet
4-Channel 170 kg (345 lb)
8-Channel 195 kg (430 kg)
307X Quick Verify 136 kg (300 lb)
Quick Verify on pallet 150 kg (330 lb)
Controllers 3070 - 300 Series Computer (in cabinet) 82 kg (180 lb)
3070 Series II - C110 Series Computer 15 kg (33 lb)
Controllers – B180L 14 kg (36 lb)
3070 Series 3 and 79000
C240 20 kg (54 lb)
Visualize P-Class PC 11.3 kg (25 lb)
34595A or 44904A off Instrument rack 182 kg (400 lb)
pallet
44990A off pallet EFS Board Handler 95 kg (200 lb)

Anti-Static Surface This is not an exhaustive description of anti-static


precautions, but as a reminder as you plan your system
Static electricity is destructive to your production area, here are some suggestions:
process and to your board test system. Careless
handling and poor planning can cost you yield and ■ Anti-static flooring. Plan to use an anti-static
system reliability. The boards you will be testing are floor covering or mats.
more easily damaged than the 3070 / 79000 board test ■ Grounding straps. Plan for foot straps in
system, but good anti-static planning will ensure high conjunction with anti-static flooring and wrist
reliability from your system.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-4


Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Floor Requirements

straps for system operators. The testhead has or other fasteners. See the 44990A EFS Board Handler
external connectors for wrist straps. Manual, 44990-90004, for more detailed information.
■ Anti-static DUT storage. Plan for anti-static tote
bins for your devices-under-test and storage for
anti-static bags.
■ Anti-static hardware. Consider the use of any
devices that will help you maintain a static-free
environment. Examples are wrist strap testers and
ion generators.
It is a good idea to take a look at your current static
conditions before planning the installation of your
system.

Immobilization for the EFS Board Handler


For 3070 / 79000 family board test systems, it is
normally sufficient to use the built-in leveling pads to
stabilize the system. However, if the system includes
the 44990A EFS Board Handler in an automated test
cell, the integration specialist will need to bolt the
testhead to the floor. Also if local building codes
require equipment to be anchored to the floor due to
potential seismic activity (earthquakes), you will need to
bolt the system to the floor. The shipping brackets used
to secure the system to the pallet are suitable for this
purpose, but you will need to supply fasteners suitable
for your situation.
A floor mount kit is sent with the 44990A EFS Board
Handler. The kit is intended for mounting the testhead
to a concrete floor. If you mount the system to a
different type of floor, you can still use the brackets
provided with the kit, but you will need to furnish bolts

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-5


Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Moving Access Requirements

Moving Access This section contains: The 307X Series II and Series 3 testhead does not
include the Support Bay on the same pallet; the Support
Requirements ■ Introduction, 4-6
Bay is shipped on a separate pallet. The 317X and 317X
■ Dimensions of the Crated System, 4-6 Series II and Series 3 systems do not include a Support
■ Dimensions of the Uncrated System, 4-8
Bay. The large testhead crate may be too large to move
to your system’s destination. If you cannot move it to its
■ Ramp Requirements, 4-11 final destination, you will need to unpack the testhead
■ Hallway and Door Width Requirements, 4-11 and roll it on its casters (see Chapter 9). Other smaller
boxes, containing the controller and test development
Introduction hardware, should not present access problems.

The Agilent 3070 / 79000 family board test system is Dimensions of the Crated System
shipped from the factory on one large crate (on a pallet)
and several smaller crates or boxes. The 307X Series I The dimensions of the 3070 / 79000 family crated
testhead includes the Support Bay on the same pallet. systems are shown in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 Dimensions of the crated system

System Type Dimension Measurement


307X Series I Testhead Length 2440 mm (96 in)
(with Support Bay)
Width 1080 mm (42.5 in)
Height 1600 mm (63 in)
317X Series I Testhead Length 1740 mm (68.25 in)
(without Support Bay)
Width 1080 mm (42.5 in)
Height 1600 mm (63 in)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-6


Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Moving Access Requirements

Table 4-2 Dimensions of the crated system (continued)

System Type Dimension Measurement


3X7X Series II, Series 3 Length 2095 mm (82.5 in)
and 3070PC Testhead
Width 1080 mm (42.5 in)
(without Support Bay)
Height 1600 mm (63 in)
3X7X Series II, 3 Length 1120 mm (44 in)
Support Bay
Width 860 mm (31 in)
Height 1600 mm (63 in)
327X Series II Quick Length 875 mm (25.6 in)
Verify
Width 625 mm (24 in)
Height 980 mm (38.6 in)
79000 Testhead Length 2095 mm (82.5 in)
Width 1080 mm (42.5 in)
Height 902 mm (33.5 in)
3X79 Series II POTS Bay Length 1120 mm (44 in)
Width 860 mm (34 in)
Height 1860 mm (73 in)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-7


Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Moving Access Requirements

Dimensions of the Uncrated System


CAUTION
When removed from the crate (pallet), the system
(testhead and Support Bay) can be rolled on its casters.
This configuration is easier to move.
✸When moving a 307X testhead like this, you must
move the testhead and Support Bay together,
subject to the restraint imposed by the cabling
between them. Be very careful not to damage
system cables during moving!

Table 4-3 on page 4-8 describes the dimensions of the


uncrated testhead and Support Bay. Chapter 9 describes
moving the tester on its casters.

Table 4-3 Dimensions of the uncrated system

System Type Dimension Measurement


307X Series I Testhead Length 2100 mm (83 in)
(with Support Bay)
Width 1000 mm (40 in)
Height 1250 mm (49 in)
317X Series I Testhead Length 1500 mm (59 in)
(without Support Bay)
Width 870 mm (34 in)
Height 900 mm (35 in)
307X and 317X Series II Length 1860 mm (73.5 in)
Testhead (without
Support Bay)
Width 820 mm (31 in)
Height 900 mm (35 in)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-8


Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Moving Access Requirements

Table 4-3 Dimensions of the uncrated system (continued)

System Type Dimension Measurement


327X Series II / 3 Length 1150 mm (45 in)
Testhead (without
Width 870 mm (34.2 in)
Support Bay)
Height 900 mm (35 in)
327XPC Series 3 Length (88.4 mm (3.5 in) longer than 327X) 1238 mm (48.5 in)
Testhead (without
Support Bay) Width 870 mm (34.2 in)
Height 900 mm (35 in)
327X Series II Support Length 940 mm (37 in)
Bay
Width 600 mm (24 in)
Height 1320 mm (52 in)
327X Series II Quick Length 744 mm (29.3 in)
Verify
Width 600 mm (24 in)
Height 720 mm (28.3 in)
307X and 317X Series 3 Length 1680 mm (66 in)
Testhead (without
Width 790 mm (31 in)
Support Bay)
Height 902 mm (35.5 in)
307XPC and 317X Length (88.4 mm (3.5 in) longer than 307X, 317X) 1765 mm (69.5 in)
Series 3 Testhead
Width 794 mm (31.3 in)
(without Support Bay)
Height 907 mm (33.5 in)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-9


Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Moving Access Requirements

Table 4-3 Dimensions of the uncrated system (continued)

System Type Dimension Measurement


79000 Testhead Length 1410 mm (55.5 in)
Width 795 mm (31.3 in)
Height 902 mm (33.5 in)
3X79 POTS Bay Length 1080 mm (42.5 in)
Width 840 mm (33 in)
Height 1600 mm (63 in)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-10


Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Moving Access Requirements

Ramp Requirements
When moved on its casters, the testhead will negotiate
ramps with inclines up to 8 percent before the leveling
feet drag on the floor.

Hallway and Door Width Requirements


As a rough guide, if you have room to move a 4-foot by
8-foot (1.25 m x 2.5 m) sheet of plywood, parallel to the
floor, through hallways and doors, you will be able to
move the crated testhead. If you cannot move the
testhead crate all the way, you must remove it from its
crate in a receiving area and push it on its casters to the
destination.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-11


Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Storage Space Requirements

Storage Space This section contains: Documentation Storage


Requirements ■ Introduction, 4-12 You will use system documentation often in the life of
■ Backup Tape Storage, 4-12 your 3070 / 79000 family system. Plan book shelf
storage for the documentation near the system, where
■ Documentation Storage, 4-12 your people will be using it. Four of the system
■ Fixture Storage, 4-13 documents that you will need are:
■ HP-UX manuals — These manuals discuss
Introduction system administration and general HP-UX tasks.
Setting up your Agilent 3070 / 79000 family board test Plan for 30 centimeters (12 inches) of shelf space.
system requires planning for storage. Obviously, you ■ Windows NT manuals - These manuals discuss
will need a handling and staging area for the boards you system adminstration and general NT tasks. Plan
will be testing. Not so obviously, there are other things for approximately 25 centimeters (10 inches) of
that you will need to store: backup tapes, system shelf space.
documentation, system fixtures, etc. If the system
includes an 44990A EFS Board Handler, you will need ■ Agilent 3070 / 79000 Family System Support
to provide a place to store the cart that comes with the Log — The 3070 / 79000 Family System Support
board handler. See the E44990A EFS Board Handler Log will contain the business cards of Agilent
Manual, 44990-90004, for information on EFS storage representatives, system license information, and
dimensions. any system repair history that your service
representative chooses to archive. It is your
reference to customer-performed preventive
Backup Tape Storage
maintenance. Keep it close to the testhead for
The 3070 / 79000 family systems are reliable, but no easy access by your system manager and the
system is safe against data loss due to system disk or Agilent representatives. Plan for one binder 5
computer failure. Always run system backups at regular centimeters (2 inches) wide.
intervals. Before the system is installed, plan for ■ Beginning with software revision B.02.75, 3070 /
backup tape storage in the system area. To be safer still, 79000 Family User manuals are only available
always place a recent backup in a different area or online on the 3070 system, and on CD-ROM.
building. They are not available printed, therefore no
storage space is needed.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-12


Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Storage Space Requirements

Fixture Storage
You will have a significant investment in your system
fixtures. They are precision machines and must be kept
clean and undamaged. Plan safe and dust-free storage
near the testhead for your fixtures.
You will receive a Pin Verification Fixture with the first
testhead at your site to use to test the fixture interface
pins of your systems. Be sure to keep the Pin
Verification Fixture in your fixture storage area.
The following items are a collection of do’s and don’t’s
with respect to fixture storage:
Don’t store fixtures on painted shelves. The bottom of
the fixture will scrape small particles of paint off the
shelf which will fall into and contaminate the testhead’s
interface pins.
If possible, cover your fixtures when not in use,
especially when the air contains a high level of
particulates.
Don’t store fixtures on paper-, cardboard-, or
carpet-covered surfaces. These materials could contain
corrosive substances that would react with the fixture’s
gold-plated personality pins.
Don’t store fixtures on wooden shelves. Wood splinters
can be carried on the bottom of the fixture to the
testhead, thereby contaminating testhead interface pins.
Don’t stack fixtures on top of one another.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-13


5 Site Preparation – Environmental Requirements
03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... ■ Air Quality Requirements, 5-2

■ Air Temperature Requirements, 5-3

■ Humidity Requirements, 5-5

Introduction
The Agilent 3070 / 79000 family systems can operate in
a wide range of environmental conditions, but do
require some minimum site management for continued
optimum use. This chapter provides site environment
requirements for reliable use of 3070 / 79000 family
systems, including air quality, air temperature, and
humidity.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 5-1


Chapter 5: Site Preparation – Environmental Requirements: Air Quality Requirements

Air Quality This section contains: be used for their removal are complex and costly. If the
source of corrosive contaminants cannot be eliminated,
Requirements ■ Introduction, 5-2
the system should be installed in an enclosed
■ Corrosive Contaminants, 5-2 environment with a fresh air supply at positive pressure.
■ Particulate Contaminants, 5-2
Particulate Contaminants
■ Viscid Contaminants, 5-2
Particulate contaminants (hard particles) consist of
Introduction smoke, dust, hair, lint, fibers and miscellaneous organic
and inorganic materials. The presence of these
As a rule, good air quality is as important for the contaminants in the air can cause system degradation,
reliability of your 3070 / 79000 family system as it is for especially where disk drives, test fixtures, and low
your production process. Three types of airborne impedance interfaces are concerned. Particulate
contaminants are discussed below. The presence of any contaminants can be filtered from the air, and
of these contaminants at the site will contribute to appropriate filters should be included with any air
system degradation, resulting in lower reliability and conditioning installation. Also consider installing "No
higher operating costs. Smoking" signs in the area. Tobacco smoke is a
well-known factor in fixture contact contamination. It
Corrosive Contaminants causes false failures leading to unnecessary DUT repairs
and higher production costs.
Corrosion is a complex form of material deterioration or
destruction by chemical or electrochemical reaction.
The presence of corrosive contaminants (gases) in the Viscid Contaminants
atmosphere is very common in industrial environments. Viscid contaminants are oily or sticky airborne
If ignored, corrosion can eventually degrade system substances that can be deposited on the system’s
performance by its effects on high impedance circuits electronic and mechanical parts. Besides contributing
and low impedance interfaces. It can also deteriorate directly to system degradation, viscid contaminants
most plastics including software storage media. The collect and hold particulate contaminants and make
effects of corrosive contaminants are usually accelerated cleaning very difficult. Viscid contaminants can be
at high humidities or high temperatures. removed from the air by filtration, but the elimination of
Corrosives generally cannot be filtered out of the air by their source, if possible, is preferable.
normal filtration methods, and the techniques that must

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 5-2


Chapter 5: Site Preparation – Environmental Requirements: Air Temperature Requirements

Air Temperature This section coontains: Introduction


Requirements ■ Introduction, 5-3 This section provides the temperature and cooling
■ Air Temperature Specifications, 5-3 requirements for the 3070 / 79000 family systems. The
requirements are summarized in Table 5-1, and
■ Cooling Requirements, 5-4 discussed in detail in the remainder of this chapter.

Table 5-1 Temperature and humidity ranges for operation and storage

Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Temperature


(measured at tester-to-fixture
interface)
Testhead 0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F) 5 to 80 percent non-condensing -40 C to 70 C (-40 F to 158 F)
Support Bay 0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F) 5 to 80 percent non-condensing -40 C to 70 C (-40 F to 158 F)
UX Controller 5 C to 40 C (41 F to 104 F) 20 to 80 percent -40 C to 65 C (-40 F to 149 F)
non-condensing
PC Controller 5 C to 40 C (41 F to 104 F) 15 to 80 percent -40 C to 70 C (-40 F to 158 F)
non-condensing

Air Temperature Specifications system components. If the temperature sensor finds that
the air temperature inside the testhead has changed ±5 C
The 3070 / 79000 family board test system is designed (±9 F) since the last time the system ran AutoAdjust All,
to operate uninterrupted in an area where the air it will again run AutoAdjust All. Therefore, to ensure
temperature is stable and in the range from 0 C to 40 C uninterrupted use, it is important that the ambient room
(32 F to 104 F), as measured at the tester-to-fixture temperature remain reasonably stable.
interface.
The system has a built-in temperature sensor inside the
testhead, located on the ASRU card. This sensor
constantly monitors the temperature of the air that has
been drawn through the testhead after it cools the

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 5-3


Chapter 5: Site Preparation – Environmental Requirements: Air Temperature Requirements

on air conditioning requirements. See Table 5-1 on


NOTE page 5-3 for more temperature and humidity
The air temperature inside the system is not specifications.
considered stable until the system has been
powered for at least 30 minutes. Cooling Requirements
Design the site cooling capability using the heat
If the sensor finds that the air temperature inside the dissipation estimates in Table 5-2. The numbers are for
system is too high, the system will shut down; typically, testheads with fully loaded modules, Serial Test power
the over-temperature shutdown point is 55 C (131 F). supplies, and fully loaded support bays.
See Cooling Requirements on page 5-4 for information

Table 5-2 System heat dissipation

Number of Modules Dissipation


3X7X Series I Testhead (with 1 Module 5100 BTU (1.5 kW)
Support Bay)
2 Modules 8500 BTU (2.5 kW)
3 Modules 11900 BTU (3.5 kW)
4 Modules 15300 BTU (4.5 kW)
3X7X Series II, Series 3, including 1 Module 10500 BTU (3.1 kW)
3070PC, Testhead (with Support
2 Modules 19700 BTU (5.8 kW)
Bay)
3 Modules 28500 BTU (8.4 kW)
4 Modules 3700 BTU (10.9 kW)
327X / 79000 1 Module 10500 BTU (2.5 kW)
3X79CT POTS Bay 8 Channels 8500 BTU (2.5 kW)
44900A EFS Board Handler 1000 BTU (0.3 kW)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 5-4


Chapter 5: Site Preparation – Environmental Requirements: Humidity Requirements

Humidity The 3070 / 79000 family board test system is designed


to operate in the range from 5 percent to 80 percent
Requirements relative humidity (non-condensing).
If the system is subjected to condensation, as if moved
from a cold loading dock into a warm (and damper)
environment, allow at least 24 hours for the system to
recover before powering up.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 5-5


6 Site Preparation – Power Requirements
03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... ■ Customer Responsibilities, 6-1 How to use this Chapter
■ How to use this Chapter, 6-1 1 Read Identifying Your System on page 6-2. You
■ Identifying Your System, 6-2 must know what type of system you have and where
the system’s PDU (there may two) is located to
■ Power Requirements, 6-5 prepare your site.
■ Is PDU Re-wiring Necessary?, 6-11
2 Read Power Requirements on page 6-5. In most
■ PDU Wiring Diagrams, 6-12 cases this section will describe all you need to do to
prepare your site.
■ Facts about PDUs, MPUs and Power Options, 6-41
3 If you are connecting the system to a different power
Customer Responsibilities configuration than it is wired for, read Is PDU
Re-wiring Necessary? on page 6-11.
It is the customer’s responsibility to (a) prepare the site
with adequate ac power for the system, and (b) connect To read about changes to 3070 / 79000 PDUs, MPUs
the system to the ac power source. These are not (module power units) and power options over time, see
Agilent’s responsibilities. Facts about PDUs, MPUs and Power Options on
page 6-41.
CAUTION
NOTE
✸ After connecting power to the system, do not
power up the system. An Agilent service Beginning in May 2001, only three power options
representative will verify the power and complete are available for the 3070 / 79000 / E2197A
the system installation and verification. systems:
3PD — 200–240 V 3-phase Delta
3PY — 208–220 V 3-phase Wye
3PN — 380–415 V 3-phase Wye with neutral

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-1


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Identifying Your System

NOTE
Identifying Your The testhead product number and serial number are An older systems may have been upgraded to
located on the rear of the testhead cradle. replace a PDU which was no longer available or
System for current reduction as described in Chapter 11,
If you are uncertain whether your 3070 system is a
Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current
Series I, Series II, Series 3, or 79000:
Reduction Conversion. If so, you will have to
■ The Series I system does not have a "Series" logo, manually compare the system wiring with the
and does not have pods (integrated cabinets) on diagrams in the appendices to determine the
the sides of the testhead. existing wiring configuration.
■ The Series II system has the "Series II" logo on
the front of the testhead, and it has wide pods on About the PDU
both sides of the testhead.
Throughout this chapter you will see references to a
■ The Series 3 system has the "Series 3" logo on the PDU (power distribution unit). The PDU is the device in
front of the testhead, and it has a wide pod only on the system to which you will connect ac power.
the right side of the testhead.
The PDU is wired differently for different power
■ The 79000 system has the "79000" logo on the top configurations. The voltage of the PDU is marked on the
of the testhead, and it has the wide pods on both front panel of the PDU. If you install a system in a
sides of the testhead. location in which the actual power does not match the
Figure 6-1 on page 6-3 shows rear views of the 3070 power configuration of the PDU, you may need to
Series I and Series II systems. rewire the outlet connections in the PDU (see Is PDU
Re-wiring Necessary? on page 6-11.
Figure 6-2 on page 6-4 shows rear views of the 3070
Series 3 and 79000 systems.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-2


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Identifying Your System

Figure 6-1 Rear views of 3070 Series I and Series II systems

317X Series I Testhead

E1170-80003 PDK

307X Series I Testhead with Support Bay


PDU #2 (Branch):
E1135A or
E1135B

PDU #1 (Main):
E1135A or
E1135B

317X Series II Testhead 327X Series II Testhead

Port2
Port3

0ut In

E1135A or E1135B PDU E1135B or E1135C PDU (Main)

307X Series II Testhead with Support Bay


View with rear
door open

SYS_ID.WPG
E1135A or E1135B PDU (Main) E1135A or E1135B PDU (Branch)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-3


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Identifying Your System

Figure 6-2 Rear views of 3070 Series 3 and 79000 systems

317X Series 3 Testhead

Port1 Port3
Port0 Port2

In
0ut

Mains
Disconnect E1135B/C PDU (Main)

307X Series 3 Testhead with Support Bay


View with rear
door open
Port1 Port3
Port0 Port2

Mains
Disconnect E1135B/C PDU (Main) E1135B/C PDU (Branch)
Mains (Single-phase options w/phase voltage
Disconnect less than 250 volts)
SYS_ID2.WPG
327X Series 3 Testhead 79000 Testhead

Port2 Port2
Port3 Port3

0ut In 0ut In

E1135B or E1135C PDU (Main) E1135B or E1135C PDU (Main)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-4


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Power Requirements

Power This section contains: ■ Be rated for a minimum of 10,000 amps


interrupting capacity (AIC) if used on a 200–240
Requirements ■ Mains Disconnect, 6-5
volt circuit, or 14,000 AIC if used on a higher
■ Power Drop, 6-5 voltage circuit.
■ Connecting Power to the PDU, 6-8
Power Drop
Mains Disconnect ■ A separate power drop should be provided for the
A mains disconnect — providing over-current and testhead due to its high current requirements.
short-circuit protection — should be provided for the ■ Separate power drops should be provided for
system. It may be a fused switch or a circuit breaker (see xDSL and POTS bays.
Figure 6-3 on page 6-6).
■ Copper wire should be used for the power drop.
If a fused switch is used, it must:
■ An electrician must determine the wire size for the
■ Be rated for 30 amps in each phase. power drop. The wires must be sized to ensure
■ Open all line conductors and neutral conductors that the voltage at the system does not drop below
where local code applies, but not the protective 90 percent of nominal (see Calculating the
earth conductor. Minimum Voltage on page 6-6).

■ Be marked "Mains Disconnect" or the equivalent ■ Convenience outlets should be provided near the
in your local language. system for external equipment such as
programming stations, extra equipment bays, and
■ Be marked with a "|" for the "On" position or "O" automation equipment. Locate the outlets within
for the "Off" position. one meter (three feet) of the device. See Chapter 3
■ Be capable of being locked in the "Off" position, to plan the location of convenience outlets.
but not in the "On" position. Convenience outlets should supply 20 amps at
100–120 volts or 10 amps at 200–240 volts.
■ Be installed as close to the system as possible,
where it can be easily reached by the system
operator.
If a circuit breaker is used, it must meet all of the above
requirements plus:

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-5


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Power Requirements

Calculating the Minimum Voltage 208 volts rms * 0.9 = 187 volts rms
208 volts rms * 0.9 * 1.414 = 265 volts peak
The voltage at the testhead must be at least 90 percent of
nominal. To calculate the minimum rms voltage See Sizing the Input Wires and Circuit Breakers
multiply the rms voltage by 0.9. To calculate the below.
minimum peak voltage, multiply the rms voltage by 0.9
and then 1.414. For example:

Figure 6-3 Wiring diagram

AC voltage source
Pigtail+.wpg

Voltage measured at the power


receptacle or PDU, with the
Electrician system on, must be
must determine 3070 / 79000 System
+6%, -10% of nominal.
Mains the conductor size
Disconnect
PDU

Circuit
Breaker
or Fuses
Customer-installed power Power receptacle and
drop and receptacle power cord from the PDU

Sizing the Input Wires and Circuit Breakers ■ For the 3X7X: a fully-loaded system with 3 STC
cards in every module.
Table 6-1 on page 6-7 shows the full-load amps (FLA)
for each system type. FLA was calculated as follows: ■ For the 79000: a fully-loaded system with 6 STC
cards in the module.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-6


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Power Requirements

Table 6-1 Series 3 and 79000 power requirements

PDU Voltage
Power line-to-neut
Option / line-to-line Full-Load Amps (FLA) for:
327X 79000 317X 307X xDSL/POTS Bay
200–240V 3-Phase Delta 3PD
L3 L2
200 13 14 18 24 12
220 13 14 18 24 12
L1 230 13 14 18 24 12
G 240 13 14 18 24 12
208–220V 3-Phase Wyel 3PY
L1

L2 L3 120 / 208 13 14 18 24 12
G 127 / 220 13 14 18 24 12
380–415V 3-Phase Wye w/Neutral 3PN
L1

N 220 / 380 9 10 10 16 10
L2 L3 230 / 400 9 10 10 16 10
G 240 / 415 9 10 10 16 10

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-7


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Power Requirements

Connecting Power to the PDU


Beginning with the serial numbers shown in Table 6-2,
all systems are shipped with SO1 power cords and plugs
factory-wired to the PDU.

Table 6-2 Beginning serial numbers of systems shipped


with power cords

System Type Testhead Testhead Serial


Product
307X E9900A US38240533
317X E9998A US38240410
327X E9997A US38240248
79000 E2190A US38050137

One of two different power cords and plugs are attached


to the PDU depending on the country where the system
will be installed:
■ International — E1135-61610: uses 5x6 mm2
5-conductor cord with a IEC 60309 plug and
mating receptacle (see Figure 6-4 on page 6-9).
■ North America — E1135-61611: uses #10 AWG
5-conductor cord with NEMA plug that mates
with NEMA L21-30 (see Figure 6-5 on
page 6-10). The female receptacle is available
locally.

1 Service with Oil resistant jacket

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-8


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Power Requirements

Figure 6-4 3070 Series 3 - International 3-phase systems

Site ac voltage source


SO-Plug-International.wpg

2.5 m (8.2 ft) of 5x6mm2 SO cord,


cord and male receptacle supplied by Agilent
(E1135-61610)
30A / 3-Ph
Breaker or 3070 / 79000 System
3-30A Fuses
Power
Receptacle
PDU
Conductors and
service sized in
accordance with
local codes
Voltage measured at the power
Power cord with receptacle or PDU, with the
female receptacle system on, should be
supplied by Agilent +6%, - 10% of nominal.

Any problems should be


reported to the local electrician
for corrective action.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-9


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Power Requirements

Figure 6-5 3070 Series 3 - North American 3-phase systems

Site ac voltage source


SO-Plug-NorthAmerica.wpg

2.5 m (8.2 ft) of #10 AWG 5 conductor SO Cord,


cord and male receptacle supplied by Agilent
(E1135-61611)
30A / 3-Ph
Breaker or 3070 / 79000 System
3-30A Fuses
Power
Receptacle
PDU
Conductors and
service sized in
accordance with
local codes
Voltage measured at the power
Power cord with receptacle or PDU, with the
female receptacle system on, should be
supplied by the +6%, - 10% of nominal.
customer
Any problems should be
reported to the local electrician
for corrective action.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-10


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Is PDU Re-wiring Necessary?

Is PDU Re-wiring Introduction switch from a non-neutral to a neutral configuration,


or vice versa, you must re-wire the PDU.
Necessary? Re-wiring the PDU is necessary only if you are
connecting it to a different power configuration than it
was wired for — not merely a different voltage, but a
different configuration (see Table 6-3). See the Table 6-3 Power Options / Configurations
examples below.
Power Configuration Description1
Suppose your system’s PDU is wired for 220 volts wye Options
(option 3PY) and you want to connect it to:
3PD 200–240 volts 3-phase Delta
1 208 volts wye (option 3PY) Includes 200V, 220V, 230V, 240V
No re-wiring is necessary; this is merely a voltage
3PY 208–220 volts 3-phase Wye
change and all internal components will handle 200
to 240 volts. Includes 208V, 220V

2 220 volts delta (option 3PD) 3PN 380–415 volts 3-phase Wye with Neutral
No re-wiring is necessary; options 3PY and 3PD Includes 380V, 400V, 415V
have the same internal wiring. 1. Regardless of the power option, the internal system compo-
nents always operates at 200–240 volts.
3 220 volts wye with neutral (opt 3PN)
Re-wiring is necessary because the internal circuits If you determine that re-wiring the PDU is necessary, go
are wired phase-to-neutral and the internal to PDU Wiring Diagrams on page 6-12.
components would be under-powered. Whenever you

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-11


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

PDU Wiring Table 6-4 on page 6-13 directs you where to find wiring
diagrams in this chapter for 3070 Series 3 and 79000
Diagrams testheads and E2197A xDSL / POTS bays.
If you have a Series I or Series II system, refer to
Chapter 10, Site Preparation – Power Requirements
for Older Systems.

NOTE
Beginning in November 2000, only 3-phase
power options are available for 3070, 79000 and
E2197A products.

NOTE
Beginning in May 2001, the PDU includes
20-centimeter-long (8-inch) power cords with
female plugs hard-wired to the output terminal
block. This means that the testhead outlet boxes
can be unplugged rather than un-wired from the
terminal block, making PDU replacement much
easier. The following figures do not show this
plug connection between the terminal block and
the outlet boxes.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-12


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Table 6-4 3070 Series 3 / 79000 PDU wiring diagram

PDU Voltage
Power line-to-neut Testheads xDSL/POTS Bay
Option / line-to-line
327X Outlet 79000 Outlet 317X Outlet 307X Outlet Outlet locations
Locations Locations Locations Locations Figure 6-28 on
Figure 6-6 on Figure 6-11 on Figure 6-16 on Figure 6-21 on page 6-36
page 6-15 page 6-20 page 6-24 page 6-28
200–240V 3-phase Delta 3PD 200 Figure 6-7 on Figure 6-12 on Figure 6-17 on Figure 6-22 on Figure 6-29 on
page 6-16 page 6-21 page 6-25 page 6-29, page 6-37
L3 L2 Figure 6-24 on
page 6-31
220 Figure 6-7 on Figure 6-12 on Figure 6-17 on Figure 6-22 on Figure 6-29 on
page 6-16 page 6-21 page 6-25 page 6-29, page 6-37
L1 Figure 6-24 on
G page 6-31
230 Figure 6-7 on Figure 6-12 on Figure 6-17 on Figure 6-22 on Figure 6-29 on
page 6-16 page 6-21 page 6-25 page 6-29, page 6-37
Figure 6-24 on
page 6-31
240 Figure 6-7 on Figure 6-12 on Figure 6-17 on Figure 6-22 on Figure 6-29 on
page 6-16 page 6-21 page 6-25 page 6-29, page 6-37
Figure 6-24 on
page 6-31

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-13


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Table 6-4 3070 Series 3 / 79000 PDU wiring diagram

PDU Voltage
Power line-to-neut Testheads xDSL/POTS Bay
Option / line-to-line
208–220V 3-Phase Wye 3PY 120 / 208 Figure 6-7 on Figure 6-12 on Figure 6-17 on Figure 6-22 on Figure 6-29 on
L1 page 6-16 page 6-21 page 6-25 page 6-29, page 6-37
Figure 6-24 on
page 6-31
127 / 220 Figure 6-7 on Figure 6-12 on Figure 6-17 on Figure 6-22 on Figure 6-29 on
page 6-16 page 6-21 page 6-25 page 6-29, page 6-37
L2 L3
Figure 6-24 on
G page 6-31
380–415V 3-Phase Wye w/Neutral 3PN 220 / 380 Figure 6-9 on Figure 6-14 on Figure 6-19 on Figure 6-25 on Figure 6-31 on
L1 page 6-18 page 6-23 page 6-27 page 6-32, page 6-39
Figure 6-27 on
page 6-34
N 230 / 400 Figure 6-9 on Figure 6-14 on Figure 6-19 on Figure 6-25 on Figure 6-31 on
page 6-18 page 6-23 page 6-27 page 6-32, page 6-39
L2 L3 Figure 6-27 on
G page 6-34
240 / 415 Figure 6-9 on Figure 6-14 on Figure 6-19 on Figure 6-25 on Figure 6-31 on
page 6-18 page 6-23 page 6-27 page 6-32, page 6-39
Figure 6-27 on
page 6-34

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-14


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

327X 1-Module System AC Outlets

Figure 6-6 327X 1-module system

Outlet 2 Outlet 3

Outlet 1

Testhead (Rear View)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-15


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-7 327X Options 3PY, 3PD


32-111.wpg

AC mains input
cord/plug provided

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-16


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-8 327X Options 3PY, 3PD

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-17


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-9 327X Option 3PN


32-111n.wpg

AC mains input
cord/plug provided

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-18


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-10 327X Option 3PN

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-19


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

79000 1-Module System AC Outlets

Figure 6-11 79000 1-module system

Outlet 2

Outlet 1
Outlet 3

Testhead (Rear View) E2190_ol.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-20


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-12 79000 Options 3PY, 3PD


79-111.wpg

AC mains input
cord/plug provided

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-21


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-13 79000 Options 3PY, 3PD

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-22


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-14 79000 Option 3PN


79-111n.wpg

AC mains input
cord/plug provided

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-23


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-15 79000 Option 3PN

317X 2-Module System AC Outlets

Figure 6-16 317X 2-module system

Outlet 0 Outlet 2

Outlet 1 Outlet 3

Testhead (Rear View)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-24


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-17 317X Options 3PY, 3PD


31-111.wpg

AC mains input
cord/plug provided

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-25


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-18 317X Options 3PY, 3PD

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-26


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-19 317X Option 3PN


31-111n.wpg

AC mains input
cord/plug provided

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-27


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-20 317X Option 3PN

307X 4-Module System AC Outlets

Figure 6-21 307X 4-module system

Outlet 0 Outlet 2

Outlet 1 Outlet 3

Support Bay Testhead (Rear View)


(Rear View)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-28


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-22 3070 Options 3PY, 3PD


30-111-1.wpg

AC mains input
cord/plug provided

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-29


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-23 3070 Options 3PY, 3PD

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-30


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-24 3070 Options 3PY, 3PD (support bay)

30-111-2.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-31


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-25 3070 Option 3PN


30-111n-1.wpg

AC mains input
cord/plug provided

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-32


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-26 3070 Option 3PN

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-33


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-27 3070 Option 3PN (support bay)

30-111n-2.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-34


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

E2197A xDSL/POTS Bay AC Outlets


The instruments in the xDSL/POTS bay, except the
Kikusui power supply, are plugged into the E1135C
PDU.
With the E2197A xDSL/POTS bay the 6811B ringer
supply is plugged into the E1135C PDU and the
isolation transformer is removed.
See the Telecom Theory and Repair Manual, Chapter 4,
for additional information.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-35


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-28 E2197A xDSL / POTS Bay (shown with POTS options)

Outlet 1 - Customer Instruments


200-240
Volts

8 7 6 5
See Table
To Gnd
See Table
4 3 2 1
See Table
To Gnd
See Table

PDU

Line Mains
Filter Input
POTS-3ph.WPG

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-36


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-29 E2197A xDSL / POTS Bay Options 3PD, 3PY

21-111.wpg

AC mains input
cord/plug provided

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-37


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-30 E2197A xDSL / POTS Bay Options 3PD, 3PY

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-38


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-31 E2197A xDSL / POTS Bay Option 3PN

21-111n.wpg

AC mains input
cord/plug provided

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-39


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams

Figure 6-32 E2197A xDSL / POTS Bay Option 3PN

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-40


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Facts about PDUs, MPUs and Power Options

Facts about PDUs, ■ 79000 systems shipped prior to the 3070 Series 3 ■ Beginning with the release of Series 3, in 2-PDU
used one E1135B PDU in the testhead and those single-phase systems, the outlet boxes were
MPUs and Power shipped shortly after the 3070 Series 3 used one removed from the Support Bay and the DUT
Options E1135C PDU. power supplies were connected directly to the
outlets on the rear of the PDU in the Support Bay.
■ Early shipments1 of Series 3 testheads used the
E1135B PDU. Later shipments used the E1135C ■ Beginning in June 1999, the DUT power supplies
PDU. were set to 220 or 2403 volts4 input in all systems,
reducing the current demand and service
■ Module Power Units (MPUs) with Power Factor
conductor size.
Corrected (PFC) Power One2 power supplies
began shipping on Series II systems in January ■ Beginning in June 1999, the equipment connected
1998. All Series 3 systems, both 3070 and 79000, to the outlets on the E1135C in the 3070 were
have PFC Module Power Units (MPUs). PFC redistributed for improved load balancing.5
reduces crest current caused by switching power
■ Beginning in June 1999, all of the outlets on the
supplies. This resulted in a reduction in power
rear panel of the E1135C PDU were changed to a
consumption and service conductor size.
two-circuit with four-outlets per circuit
■ Beginning with the release of Series 3, the configuration.6
controllers were plugged into 208–240 volt
outlets, reducing service conductor size. The
controller products requiring unswitched power
were plugged into the PDU.

1 Shipped between July 24, 1998 and Sept. 4, 1998


2 Power One Power Factor Corrected (PFC) power supplies can be identified by model number: Non-PFC model number =
HPM 5B2A8BEBQ5236 or PFC Model number = HPF5B2A8BEBQ5437. Plug J5 on the rear corner of the power supply is rotated 90
degrees on the PFC model. The plug retaining clips are parallel to the short side of the supply on the PFC model and parallel to the longer
bottom of the supply on the non-PFC model.
3 220 volts for 200–220 volts and 240 volts for 230–240 volts.
4 See Chapter 11, Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion, for setting the DUT power supply input voltage.
5 See the 3070 / 79000 Repair Manuals, Chapter 1B, for additional information.
6 See the E1135C Power Distribution Unit Operating and Service Manual, E1135-90001, for additional information.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-41


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Facts about PDUs, MPUs and Power Options

■ In June 1999, the followings changes were made ■ Beginning in July 2000, all three-phase systems
to the Corporate Price List (CPL). were shipped with power cords. The power cord
used is based on the power option and country
Removed Options:
code.
05A (200 V 2-Phase Open Delta with Phase
■ Beginning in November 2000, power options are
Center-Tap Neutral)
ordered on the E1135C PDU instead of the 3070 /
0EF (120/208–127/220 V 3-Phase Wye with 79000 / xDSL / POTS bays. For example: E1135C
Neutral) (Replaced by AWW) Opt. AWW is ordered instead of E99XXA Opt.
AWW.
Added Options:
■ Beginning in November 2000, only 3-phase
0ED (200 V 3-phase Delta)
power options are available for 3X7X and
05C (220 V 3-phase Delta) E2197A products.
05H (230 V 3-phase Delta) ■ Beginning in May 2001, the PDU includes
20-centimeter-long (8-inch) power cords with
0E6 (240 V 3-phase Delta)
female plugs hard-wired to the output terminal
AWW (120/208 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral block. This means that the testhead outlet boxes
(Replaced 0EF)) can be unplugged rather than un-wired from the
terminal block, making PDU replacement much
AWV (120/208 V Single-Phase Wye with
easier. The following figures do not show this
Neutral)
plug connection between the terminal block and
AWZ (127/220 V Single-Phase Wye with the outlet boxes.
Neutral)
AWY (100/200 V Single-Phase Center-Tap
Neutral)
AWX (200 V Single-Phase Non-earthed)
■ Series 3 current requirements were re-calculated
and empirically checked, verifying lower current
requirements when all the above enhancements
were implemented.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-42


Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Facts about PDUs, MPUs and Power Options

■ In May 2001, the number of power options was


reduced from nine to three and changed as shown
in Table 6-5.

Table 6-5 New Power Options

NEW Description1 OLD Description


Power Power
Options Options (line-to-neutral / line-to-line)
3PD 200–240 V 3-phase Delta 0ED 200 V 3-phase Delta
05C 220 V 3-phase Delta
05H 230 V 3-phase Delta
0E6 240 V 3-phase Delta
3PY 208–220 V 3-phase Wye AWW 120 / 208 V 3-phase Wye with Neutral
05E 127 / 220 V 3-phase Wye with Neutral
3PN 380–415 V 3-phase Wye with Neutral 0E5 220 / 380 V 3-phase Wye with Neutral
05L 230 / 400 V 3-phase Wye with Neutral
0E7 240 / 415 V 3-phase Wye with Neutral
1. Regardless of the power option, the system always operates at 200–240 volts.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-43


7 Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum
Requirements
03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... ■ Compressed Air Requirements, 7-2

■ Vacuum Requirements, 7-4

■ Compressed Air and Vacuum Primer, 7-19

Introduction
Both compressed (or pressurized) air and vacuum are
used in the Agilent 3070 / 79000 testhead. Compressed
air is used primarily to secure the test fixture to the
testhead. Vacuum is used primarily to actuate the test
fixture: that is, to make contact between the board under
test and the probes in the fixture. Compressed air is
sometimes also used for air-assisted, solenoid-actuated
valves used to switch the vacuum, and for air-actuated
test fixtures.
The site preparation requirements for compressed air
and vacuum are different depending on the type of
testhead you are preparing the site for. This chapter
describes those requirements. For more about
compressed air and vacuum principles and terminology,
see the short Compressed Air and Vacuum Primer on
page 7-19.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-1


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Compressed Air Requirements

Compressed Air This section contains: between the pins on the fixture and the spring-loaded
interface pins in the testhead.
Requirements ■ Connecting Air to the Testhead, 7-2

■ Compressed Air Specifications, 7-2 Compressed Air Specifications


■ Air Quality, 7-3 Table 7-1 shows the compressed air specifications for
The Agilent 3070 / 79000 family uses compressed air to the 3070 / 79000 family systems. The air flow rates
pressurize air cylinders that actuate fixture pull-down when using Performance Port are the maximum that
towers. Pull-down towers are used to pull and hold a could be needed. Some installations might require lower
fixture down onto the testhead, enabling contact volumes.

Table 7-1 Compressed air specifications for 3070 / 79000 systems

Description Measurement
Maximum Pressure for Testhead Only 1035 kPa (150 psi)
Minimum Pressure for Testhead with Performance Port 690 kPa (100 psi)
Minimum Pressure for Testhead Only 480 kPa (70 psi)
Minimum Flow Rate for Testhead Only 0.66 l/s at STP (1.4 SCFM) 1
Minimum Flow Rate for Testhead with Performance Port 7.1 l/s at STP (15 SCFM)
Relative Humidity allowed 70% for compressed air (150 psi) at 25 degrees C
50% for compressed air (150 psi) at 40 degrees C
Dew point must be not more than 5 degrees C
1. l/s is liters per second. STP is standard temperature and pressure. SCFM is standard cubic feet per minute. See the Com-
pressed Air and Vacuum Primer on page 7-19.

Connecting Air to the Testhead for situations when the air line must be disconnected.

Install compressed air lines using rigid line to a point When the system is installed, connect the air to the
near the testhead. An air cutoff valve is recommended testhead with a flexible line that has a Hansen Series

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-2


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Compressed Air Requirements

3000 Push-tite 1/4-inch female coupling or equivalent


(Agilent PN 0100-1655). The testhead air input
connector is shown in Figure 7-1 on page 7-3.

Figure 7-1 Compressed air connection to the testhead

Air regulator
Air Output for
inside testhead
external
03066-67911 applications
0100-1655
female
coupling

Air Input
connector on
rear of testhead

AIR2.WPG

Air Quality
The compressed air must be oil-free and must meet the
humidity specifications in Table 7-1. We recommend
that the air be filtered to remove contaminants such as
oil and aerosols. The filter should filter 0.3-micron
particles.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-3


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements

Vacuum This section contains: under test down onto test probes. Because of the
different sizes of test systems, test fixtures, and the
Requirements ■ Vacuum System, 7-4
variety of boards that can be tested, vacuum
■ Vacuum Recommendations, 7-4 requirements can vary significantly.
■ Connecting Vacuum to the Testhead, 7-5 Agilent recommends that you work with a qualified
■ Vacuum Guidelines, 7-9 vendor of vacuum pumps that can give you advice based
on your requirements.
■ Vacuum Examples, 7-9

■ Vacuum Control Assembly, 7-17 Vacuum Recommendations


Table 7-2 shows the vacuum recommendations for a
Vacuum System typical 3070 / 79000 family system.
The Agilent 3070 / 79000 family system uses vacuum
(with vacuum-actuated test fixtures) to pull the board

Table 7-2 Vacuum recommendations for 3070 / 79000 systems

Description Measurement
Recommended Flow 18.9 l/s at STP (40 SCFM)1 Use this value as a guideline. Vacuum specification is dependent on
Rate of Pump the fixture, not the Agilent 3070 / 79000 testhead. Agilent has found this specification will pull
down most fixtures.
Pressure Performance 50 kPa (7.2 psi)1
Vacuum Control Ports 4 vacuum control ports: switched 24 volts dc, 750 milliamps maximum per port
available for controlling
external vacuum valves
1. l/s is liters per second. STP is standard temperature and pressure. SCFM is standard cubic feet per minute. psi is pounds per
square inch. See the Compressed Air and Vacuum Primer on page 7-19.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-4


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements

Connecting Vacuum to the Testhead


Agilent 3070 Series I and Series II testheads do not have
vacuum-switching solenoids (valves)1 inside the
testhead, so external vacuum solenoids must be installed
near the testhead to control the vacuum. If vacuum
hoses need to be disconnected from the testhead in order
to service it, you can switch off the vacuum using the
external solenoids.
The 3070 Series 3 and 79000 testheads have vacuum
solenoids (valves) inside the testhead, so they usually do
not need external vacuum solenoids. In order to turn off
vacuum and remove the vacuum hoses before servicing
this testhead, you should install a vacuum cut-off valve
near the system.
Figure 7-2 on page 7-6 shows the four vacuum ports at
the back of the 307X Series I and II testhead and their
outlets near the modules. Figure 7-3 on page 7-7 shows
the 317X Series I and II vacuum ports and outlets.
Figure 7-4 on page 7-8 shows the vacuum port
locations on 3X7X and 79000 Series 3 systems. The
vacuum manifolds shown are a part of the optional
vacuum system for 317X and 307X Series 3 systems.

1 There is an exception: any one-module (327X) Series I, II or 3 or 79000 testhead always includes one internal vacuum solenoid valve. A
second internal vacuum solenoid valve is optional.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-5


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements

Figure 7-2 307X Series I, II vacuum ports

Vacuum Outlet 2 Vacuum Outlet 0

Vacuum Outlet 3 Vacuum Outlet 1

Vacuum Ports,
Top of Testhead 1-inch, male
connectors

2 3
Rear of Testhead 0 1

site_prep5.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-6


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements

Figure 7-3 317X Series I, II system vacuum ports

Vacuum Outlet 2

Vacuum Outlet 3

Top of Testhead Vacuum Ports,


1-inch male
connectors

2 3
Rear of Testhead

site_prep18.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-7


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements

Figure 7-4 3X7X Series 3 and 79000 vacuum port locations

317X Series 3 Testhead

Port3
Port2 E9998-63200
2-Module Manifold*
0ut
In

E1135C PDU (Main)

307X Series 3 Testhead with Support Bay


View with rear
E9900-63200 door open
Port1 Port3
4-Module Manifold Port0 Port2

0ut
In

E1135C PDU (Main) E1135C PDU (Branch)

3279 Series 3 Testhead 79000 Testhead


Optional Optional
Port3 Port2 Port2
Port3

0ut In 0ut In

E1135C PDU (Main) E1135B or E1135C PDU (Main)


*Note: The E9998-63200 manifold will not work on the 3279 or 79000 testhead

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-8


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements

Vacuum Guidelines Figure 7-5 on page 7-10 is a schematic representation


of a two-module 307X system with one vacuum control
Keep these additional guidelines in mind as you design output used to control both vacuum ports 2 and 3. The
your system: vacuum control solenoid is shown to be one of the
air-piloted types, thus the compressed air line to the
CAUTION device.

✸Vacuum pumps installed for the tester should be


installed outside or vented outside in order to
Figure 7-6 on page 7-11 shows a four-module 307X
system with separate control of each vacuum port. This
prevent the vacuum pump from exhausting arrangement allows each vacuum port to be actuated
oil-bearing air or carbon fragments in areas where separately, but this flexibility requires the expense of
there are people. four solenoid valves and filters. The size and type of
boards you test may make it unnecessary for you to
individually control the four ports. If all the boards that
■ Use the largest diameter of pipe practical from the
you test are large and require all four modules, there is
vacuum pump to the testhead area. This
no reason to individually control the four ports.
diminishes vacuum loss due to friction in the
piping (especially at bends), and provides a Figure 7-7 on page 7-12 shows a four-module 307X
demand reservoir. system with two solenoid valves and two manual
vacuum valves.
■ Agilent also recommends that a filter be installed
between the vacuum supply and the testhead to In this example, the two solenoid valves always control
prevent dirt or contaminants from being sucked one port, but each may control a second vacuum port if a
through the test fixture into the vacuum supply. manual valve is opened.

Vacuum Examples
This section shows some of the vacuum control schemes
possible for the 3070. The pressure meters, flow meter,
and filter in these examples are optional but
recommended.
If the vacuum manifold is used, a 2-inch vacuum hose
should be used. If vacuum ports are connected
individually, a 1-inch vacuum hose must be used.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-9


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements

Figure 7-5 24-Vdc air-piloted solenoid vacuum example

Support Bay

Testhead
2 3

0 1

1-inch flexible
tubing

Air Line
Filter
Vacuum
Source

Pressure 24 Vdc
Air-Piloted site_prep3.wpg
Meter
Solenoid

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-10


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements

Figure 7-6 Individually activated vacuum port control example

Support Bay

Testhead 2 3

0 1

Air Line

Vacuum
Source
Pressure
Meter

24 Vdc Solenoid Filters site_prep2.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-11


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements

Figure 7-7 Vacuum with manual cutoff example

Support Bay

Testhead
2 3

0 1

Flow 24 Vdc
Meter Manual
Solenoid Filter Valve
Vacuum
Source
Pressure Manual
Meter Filter Valve

24 Vdc site_prep4.wpg
Solenoid

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-12


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements

Figure 7-8 on page 7-14 shows the 317X with the


E9945A vacuum option installed.1 Figure 7-9 on
page 7-15 shows the 307X with the E9946A vacuum
option installed. Figure 7-10 on page 7-16 shows the
3279 and 79000 with the E9945A vacuum option
installed.
The factory default relay wiring is shown; however, the
vacuum solenoid (valve) is not voltage polarity
sensitive. The vacuum solenoid valves are air pressure
assisted with 280 kPa (40 psi) applied to each valve. A
vacuum filter is not shown, since the air passes through
the vacuum solenoid before the filter; however, you may
desire to install a filter to keep vacuum lines from
picking up unwanted materials.

1 Vacuum valve inside diameter (ID) is 0.75 inch and outside diameter (OD) is 1.5 inches.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-13


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements

Figure 7-8 317X Series 3 with E9945A vacuum option

System Card

Relay 1
+ 1
_ 2
Port 3
Relay 2
+ 3
_ 4 Port 2

Relay 3
+ 5
_ 6
+ 1

Relay 4
+ 7
_
+
2
3

_ 8
_
+
_
4
5

+ 7
_
8
+

+
9
_
9 10

Relay 5
11

_ 10
12

Remote 11
Shutdown
12
Jumper
E9998-63200
2-Module Manifold
E9945A Vacuum components shown above the dotted line

Vacuum components below the dotted line


are customer supplied

Vacuum
Source Pressure
Meter
Manual Cut-off Valve 2-inch Vacuum Hose S3SiteP4

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-14


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements

Figure 7-9 307X Series 3 with E9946A vacuum option

System Card

Relay 1
+ 1
_ 2
Port 1 Port 3
Relay 2
+ 3
_ 4 Port 0 Port 2

Relay 3
+ 5
_ 6
+ 1

Relay 4
+ 7
_
+
2
3

_ 8
_
+
_
4
5
6

+ 7
_
8
+

+
9
_
9 10

Relay 5
11

_ 10
12

Remote 11
Shutdown
12
Jumper
E9900-63200
4-Module Manifold
E9946A Vacuum components shown above the dotted line

Vacuum components below the dotted line


are customer supplied

Vacuum
Source Pressure
Meter
Manual Cut-off Valve 2-inch Vacuum Hose S3Sitep3.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-15


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements

Figure 7-10 3279 and 79000 vacuum system with optional vacuum valve

Standard Optional Vacuum Valve


Vacuum Valve E3770-67900
System Card

Relay 1
+ 1
_ 2
Port 2
Relay 2
+ 3
_ 4 Port 3

Relay 3
+ 5
_ 6
+ 1

Relay 4
+ 7
_
+
2

_ 8
_
+
_
4
5
6

+ 7
_
8
+

+
9
_
9 10

Relay 5
11

_ 10
12

Remote 11
Shutdown
12
Jumper

Standard/Optional Vacuum components shown above the dotted line

Vacuum components below the dotted line are customer supplied

2-inch Vacuum Hose

Vacuum
Source Pressure
Meter
79KSitep.wpg
Manual Cut-off Valve

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-16


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements

Vacuum Control Assembly


The Agilent E4047A Vacuum Control Assembly and
Installation Kit, shown in Figure 7-11, contains
everything necessary to connect the main vacuum
supply line to the board test system without internal
vacuum valves.
The E4047A Vacuum Control Assembly is a
pre-assembled metal housing. Features include two 24
Vdc, air-assisted, 3-way vacuum solenoid-actuated
valves; in-line vacuum filters; air pressure regulator;
manual valve for 1-channel or 2-channel operation.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-17


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements

Figure 7-11 E4047A vacuum control assembly

KAY
P neum at i cs

15

20 10

KAY
25 5
P neum at i cs

30 0

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-18


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Compressed Air and Vacuum Primer

Compressed Air This section contains: degrees Celsius (32 degrees Fahrenheit), and the
standard pressure is one atmosphere (101.3 kPa or 14.7
and Vacuum Primer ■ Introduction, 7-19
psi).
■ Compressed Air, 7-19
Common units for measuring flow rate are liters per
■ Vacuum, 7-19 second (l/s) and cubic feet per minute (CFM). When
using standard conditions, the units are written as “l/s at
Introduction STP” or “SCFM” (standard cubic feet per minute).
There are two key concepts involved in understanding
the compressed air and vacuum requirements for the
Compressed Air
Agilent 3070 / 79000 system. The first is pressure and The 3070 uses compressed air to activate both the
the second is flow rate. fixture pull-down towers and the vacuum valves. The
Pressure is the force per unit area that a gas exerts on a 3070 also provides an outlet for supplying air to
surface. If zero is used as a reference, the measurement accessory equipment such as handlers and air assisted
of pressure is called “absolute”; if the local atmospheric fixtures.
pressure is used as a reference, the measurement is The minimum pressure needed is 480 kPa (70 psi). The
called “gage.” Although atmospheric pressure varies 3070 has an internal regulator to restrict the maximum
with altitude and weather, gage pressure is typically pressure inside the system to 550 kPa (80 psi).
used for engineering measurements, so it is used in this
manual. A pressure value below zero gage is considered The flow rate needed is dependent on how often fixtures
a vacuum. are changed, but is generally much less than what is
available in most production areas. Additional air (flow
Common units for measuring pressure are kilopascals rate) may be needed to supply the outlet for custom
(kPa), pounds per square inch (psi), and atmospheres fixtures or presses depending on their requirements.
(atm).
Flow rate is the quantity of a gas moving through a Vacuum
given area per unit of time. Since air is compressible, The 3070 doesn’t use any vacuum directly, rather the
you must know both the speed and pressure of the air vacuum is used by the fixture to pull a device under test
when measuring the flow rate. To reduce confusion, the (DUT) onto the probes. The 3070 provides valves,
industry has agreed on a standard set of conditions for plumbing and control to assist in supplying vacuum to
flow rate measurements called “standard temperature the customer’s fixture.
and pressure” (STP). The standard temperature is zero

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-19


Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Compressed Air and Vacuum Primer

The pressure requirements for vacuum come from the


need to compress the probes, fixture springs and seals.
Since most commercial vacuum systems operate around
50 kPa (7.5 psi), vacuum fixtures are limited in their
ability to handle DUTs with high probe densities. If the
sum of the probe, spring and seal forces divided by the
area of the DUT is above 48 kPa (7 psi) the fixture will
not be able to properly pull the DUT onto the probes.
The flow requirements for vacuum come from fixture
leaks, number of fixture cycles per minute, the size of
the DUT and the need to quickly evacuate the fixture to
make a good seal around the DUT. Due to the variability
of these factors, it is difficult to provide an exact flow
rate recommendation. Agilent has found that a flow rate
of 19 l/s (40 SCFM) will pull down most fixtures.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-20


8 Site Preparation – Communications Cabling
Requirements
03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... ■ Local Area Network Requirements, 8-2

■ Gathering Configuration Information for UNIX Startup


and Networking, 8-10

■ Gathering Configuration Information for MS Windows


Networking, 8-13

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-1


Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Local Area Network Requirements

Local Area Network This section contains: expense and trouble in the future. For help,
contact your area’s Agilent LAN specialist.
Requirements ■ Introduction, 8-2
Designate a LAN manager at your site, and begin
■ Agilent Local Area Network Plan, 8-2 developing that person’s expertise.
■ Sample 3070 Series I Network Scheme, 8-2
Agilent Local Area Network Plan
■ Agilent 3070 Series II Networking, 8-5
Be sure to add LAN planning to your system plan
■ Agilent 3070 Series 3 / 79000 Networking, 8-7
drawing. Show how the system relates to existing LAN
and planned LAN growth. Your Agilent representative
Introduction will use it when the system is installed.
Your Agilent 3070 / 79000 family board test system
communicates with other systems via IEEE 802.3 Local Sample 3070 Series I Network Scheme1
Area Networking. All the necessary software and
The 3070 Series I family systems are shipped with a
licensing comes with the system, but you will need to
recommended list of host names and IP addresses. The
purchase and install the LAN cabling and associated
’/etc/hosts’ and ’/etc/netlinkrc’ files contain the
LAN hardware external to the system. For help, contact
suggested names and addresses. If you are connecting
your area’s Agilent Local Area Network specialist.
to a facility LAN, or if you ever plan to connect to a
Begin planning your LAN with the steps below, facility LAN in the future, you will need to change the
depending on whether you have an existing LAN IP addresses. Even if you need to change the IP
on-site: addresses, you should consider using the suggested
naming convention. The remainder of this section
■ If you already have a facility LAN — With a
describes the recommended naming convention.
Local Area Network already in place, all you need
to do is work with your facility LAN expert to The sample ’/etc/hosts’ file sets up nine 3070 Series I
integrate the 3070 / 79000 system into your LAN. systems:
■ If you do not have facility LAN — If the 3070 / hp3070a
79000 system will be your first LAN system, now hp3070b
is the time to make your Local Area Network hp3070c
plans. Time spent preparing for LAN will save hp3070d

1 This networking configuration is no longer supported.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-2


Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Local Area Network Requirements

hp3070e hp3070c might be used by a program development


hp3070f group.
hp3070g
Even a small network can be set up in many different
hp3070h
ways. It is important to carefully plan for your needs
hp3070i
before installing the LAN so that the configuration can
Each of these systems may have up to five diskless provide maximum flexibility and benefit.
workstations (called Test Development Stations). For
example, hp3070a could have these workstations: Install the LAN Cabling
Figure 8-1 on page 8-4 shows a small network that uses Before the 3070 / 79000 family system is delivered,
this scheme. install and test the external LAN interface cabling.
In Figure 8-1 on page 8-4, there are three 3070 Series I
systems. hp3070a, hp3070b, and hp3070c are systems
with disks. These could be either testhead controllers or
Test Development Centers; from the LAN standpoint it
does not matter.
hp3070a has no workstations, known as Test
Development Stations, associated with it. Only the
hp3070a boots from the disk that is connected to it.
Perhaps this system is a testhead with high usage.
hp3070b has two workstations with it: hp3070b1 and
hp3070b2. These two nodes share the disk connected to
hp3070b, and they boot from that disk. This could be a
board test system or a Test Development Center. Note
that if the system has a testhead, the disk and the
controller must serve two Test Development Stations as
well as the testhead, and that could slightly slow the
system’s test throughput.
hp3070c has five workstations associated with it. This
configuration probably makes the most sense if hp3070c
is a Test Development Center. The cluster around

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-3


Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Local Area Network Requirements

Figure 8-1 An example of 3070 Series I family networkp3070a5

hp3070a

hp3070b1

hp3070b1

hp3070b

hp3070c1 hp3070c2 hp3070c3

hp3070c4 hp3070c5

hp3070c
sitep13.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-4


Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Local Area Network Requirements

Agilent 3070 Series II Networking


Networking is very versatile with the 3070 Series II
system. Before installing the Series II system, fill in the
table below with the system name and IP address of the
testhead controller and every other new controller in
your Series II network.
An example of the 3070 Series II internal testhead and
external LAN connections is shown in Figure 8-2 on
page 8-6. The optional LAN/Gateway is only used if a
HP 9000 712/60/100 controller is used. All other Series
700 controllers have an GPIB card installed in the
controller.

System Name IP Address


Testhead
Controller
Other Controller
#1
Other Controller
#2

Install the LAN Cabling


Before the 3070 / 79000 family system is delivered,
install and test the external LAN interface cabling.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-5


Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Local Area Network Requirements

Figure 8-2 An example of 3070 Series II network

Public LAN Router / Public LAN


/Backbone Gateway /Backbone
as needed

Test Development
Center System 2..n on Hub
HUB
Test Development
Station
10BaseT
External Site Lan
50 5 Terminator
1250-0207

15.3.112.3
To HP-IB Optional LAN/Gateway for BNC Tee
Devices 712/60/100 Controllers only 1250-0781

15.3.112.2 Testhead
Module 3 Mod. 2 Mod. 1 Mod. 0
Controller
Control Control Control Control Sys Card

10Base2
Internal Testhead Lan

Control Cables E1170-61604 s2lan


System 1 on Hub

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-6


Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Local Area Network Requirements

Agilent 3070 Series 3 / 79000 Networking


Networking with the 3070 / 79000 system has been
simplified by having all test servers contain a hard drive.
The concept of a diskless work workstation has been
eliminated with 3070 Series 3 and the 79000. The test
servers are connected to the LAN the same way as any
other servers.
With software revision B.03.00 in each testhead the
LAN has been extended to the ControlXT cards, as
shown in Figure 8-3 on page 8-8. Each external site
LAN interface (LAN0) must have a unique IP address,
but the internal testhead LAN interface (LAN1) within
each system is identical, including identical System
Card and ControlXT Card LAN addresses. However,
the hardware address for each System Card and
ControlXT is unique. The hardware address, not to be
confused with the LAN address, is assigned at the
factory and is marked on each card. See the Repair
manuals for information on how to read and change the
system files to match the hardware address of the cards
in the system.
The 3070 with MS Windows networking, shown in
Figure 8-4 on page 8-9, is very similar to the 3070 with
HP-UX networking. The major change is the internal IP
addresses.

Install the LAN Cabling


Before the 3070 / 79000 family system is delivered,
install and test the external LAN interface cabling.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-7


Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Local Area Network Requirements

Figure 8-3 An example 3070 Series 3 / 79000 network

Public LAN Router / Public LAN


/Backbone Gateway /Backbone
as needed

Test
Server System 2..n on Hub
HUB
Test
Server 10BaseT
External Site Lan
50 5 Terminator 10BaseT
1250-0207

50 5 Terminator 10Base2 10Base2


1250-2076 BNC Tee Converter
1250-0781 0960-1009

*15.3.112.7 *15.3.112.6 *15.3.112.5 *15.3.112.4 *15.3.112.2 Testhead


Mod. 3 Mod. 2 Mod. 1 Mod. 0 Controller
ControlXT ControlXT ControlXT Sys Card
ControlXT *15.3.112.1 for HP-UX

To AC
* 15.x.xxx.x becomes 10.x.xxx.x beginning with systems shipped in May 2000 Power
Control Cables
E4000-61628 System 1 on Hub s3lan

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-8


Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Local Area Network Requirements

Figure 8-4 An example 3070 Series 3 3070 MS Windows network

Public LAN Router / Public LAN


/Backbone Gateway /Backbone
as needed

Test
Server System 2..n on Hub
HUB
Test
Server 10BaseT
External Site Lan
50 5 Terminator 10BaseT
1250-0207

50 5 Terminator 10Base2 10Base2


1250-2076 BNC Tee Converter
1250-0781 0960-1009

10.3.112.7 10.3.112.6 10.3.112.5 10.3.112.4


10.3.112.2 Testhead
Mod. 3 Mod. 2 Mod. 1 Mod. 0 Controller
ControlXT ControlXT ControlXT ControlXT Sys Card
10.3.112.10 for PC

To AC
Power
Control Cables
E4000-61628 System 1 on Hub s3-PClan.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-9


Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Gathering Configuration Information for UNIX Startup and Networking

Gathering Use this section as a tool to gather necessary


information from the network administrator so it can be
Configuration entered when the system is set up.
Information for Choose from the two situations below and follow the
UNIX Startup and associated instructions.
Networking ■ If the UNIX-based controller WILL NOT be
connected to a network:
Complete only the first two items (Hostname
(Required even if the system is non-networked)
and IP Address) in Table 8-1.
■ If the UNIX-based controller WILL be connected
to a network:
Complete Table 8-1.

CAUTION

✸Do not configure to a DHCP network server.


Factory tests have shown this configuration to be
unstable.

NOTE
DNS and NIS are the only supported network
protocols for UNIX systems.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-10


Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Gathering Configuration Information for UNIX Startup and Networking

Table 8-1 HP-UX LAN configuration information

Task (Network Parameter) Write System Information Here Description

CAUTION

✸ Consult with the network administrator. Incorrect entries can cause system and network conflicts and errors.
1 Hostname The name by which this controller will be known. It must contain no more than
(Required even if the system is eight characters, contain only letters, numbers, underscore (_), or hyphen (-),
non-networked) and start with a letter.

NOTE
Upper-case letters are not recommended.
The first component of a host name should contain no more than
eight characters, for compatibility with the uname command.

2 IP Address Supply a network IP address for this system OR


(Required even if the system is If not connecting to a network, supply an IP address that will not be a conflict
. . . should this system should ever get connected to a network.
non-networked)
3 Will this system be connected to a [ ] Yes [ ] No Select either Yes or No. If selecting no, make no further entry in this table.
network?
4 Subnetwork Mask The subnetwork mask address ignores information that is not specific to the
. . . local network.
5 Gateway Host Name The machine designated to connect outside of the subnet. If there is not a
designated machine for this, use the Hostname (Required even if the system
is non-networked) from Task 1.
6 Gateway IP Address The address designated to connect outside of the subnet. If there is not a
. . . designated address for this, use the IP Address from Task 2.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-11


Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Gathering Configuration Information for UNIX Startup and Networking

Table 8-1 HP-UX LAN configuration information (continued)

Task (Network Parameter) Write System Information Here Description


7 Local Domain Name The company domain name.

8 DNS Server Hostname If configuring DNS, the local network DNS server name.
(Domain Name System) Do not complete if configuring for NIS.

9 DNS Server IP Address If configuring DNS, the local network DNS server IP address.
. . . Do not complete if configuring for NIS
10 NIS Domain Name If configuring NIS, the local NIS server name.
Do not complete if configuring for DNS.

NOTE
Most systems do not use NIS.

11 Wait for NIS Server on Bootup? [ ] Yes [ ] No If configuring NIS, select either Yes or No.
Do not complete if configuring for DNS.
12 Will this TDS be a Font Server? [ ] Yes [ ] No Select either Yes or No. Ask yourself, will X-terminals be served by this system?

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-12


Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Gathering Configuration Information for MS Windows Networking

Gathering Before the Customer Engineer (CE) can turn on the first two items in the table are still necessary for system
controller, they will need the information in Table 8-2. set-up. In case of problems, see the Administering
Configuration Before they come to the site, fill out the appropriate Agilent 3070 Systems (MS Windows Version), which is
Information for MS information with the assistance of the network online in the User Manuals.Gathering Network
administrator or LAN manager. This is vital information Configuration Information
Windows they will need to set up the system for networking.
Use this section to gather the information needed to
Networking Some of the information may not be needed depending
configure your computer for a LAN.
on how your networking is implemented. Even if you
don’t intend to put the system on a network at all, the
Table 8-2 Windows NT LAN configuration information

Task (Network Parameter) Write System Information Here Description


1 Network Identification Domain Computer Name or A unique name that identifies your computer controller.
Hostname:
■ Computer Name, or
■ Hostname

2 Network Identification Member of (select one): The Workgroup name is the name of a computer or group of computers on a
[ ] Workgroup peer-to-peer network.
■ Workgroup or Domain?
[ ] Domain
Workgroup or Domain name The Domain name is the identifier for the server that controls and manages a
group of computers on a client/server network.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-13


Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Gathering Configuration Information for MS Windows Networking

Table 8-2 Windows NT LAN configuration information (continued)

Task (Network Parameter) Write System Information Here Description


3 Network Identification Domain User Name: This is the name by which your computer is recognized by the network domain.
See your network administrator to establish or verify domain account
■ Create a Computer Account in the
information.
Domain
Domain Password:

4 Will a DHCP Server be Used? [ ] Yes [ ] No If yes, go to Task 16 (Will Other Network Protocols Be Configured?).
5 IP Address IP Address: The IP address for this workstation.

. . .
Subnet Mask: This number masks (ignores) information that is not specific to your local
network.
. . .
Default Gateway: IP address of the system that is used to route network traffic to other networks.

. . .
6 Advanced IP Addressing Gateway(s) for any backup routers of network traffic.
■ Gateways . . .

. . .
7 Will DNS be Used? [ ] Yes [ ] No If no, go to Task 12 (Will WINS Be Used?).
(Domain Name System)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-14


Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Gathering Configuration Information for MS Windows Networking

Table 8-2 Windows NT LAN configuration information (continued)

Task (Network Parameter) Write System Information Here Description


8 DNS The name by which this system will be known under DNS is the same as the
Computer Name, or in Task 1.
■ Hostname
9 DNS The domain in which this machine will operate. This domain is associated with
your TCP/IP address.
■ Domain
10 DNS IP Addresses (in order) of DNS servers that this system uses for resolving host
. . . names.
■ DNS Service Search Order

. . .
11 DNS Ordered domain suffix list used when searching for a host.
■ Domain Suffix Search Order

12 Will WINS Be Used? [ ] Yes [ ] No If no, go to Task 16 (Will Other Network Protocols Be Configured?).
(Windows Internet Name Services)
13 WINS Address
. . .
■ Primary WINS Server
■ Secondary WINS Server
. . .
14 WINS Address [ ] Enable DNS for Windows Check or uncheck either of these boxes as applicable.
Resolution
■ Checkboxes
[ ] Enable LMHOSTS Lookup CAUTION

✸Resolution.
If configuring for DNS, check Enable DNS for Windows

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-15


Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Gathering Configuration Information for MS Windows Networking

Table 8-2 Windows NT LAN configuration information (continued)

Task (Network Parameter) Write System Information Here Description


15 WINS Address
■ Scope ID
16 Will Other Network Protocols Be [ ] AppleTalk Protocol This list is not exhaustive; other protocols can be configured. Use this space to
Configured? document other network protocol information.
[ ] DLC Protocol

[ ] NetBEUI Protocol

[ ] NWLink IPX/SPX Compatible


Transport

[ ] Point To Point Tunneling


Protocol

[ ] Streams Environment

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-16


9 Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions
03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... ■ Inventory The Shipment, 9-2

■ Uncrating The System, 9-3

■ Placing The System, 9-15

■ Re-shipping a 3070 and 79000 System, 9-16

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-1


Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Inventory The Shipment

Inventory The Use the packing list that came with your system to
determine if the system was fully received. Carefully
Shipment examine the boxes for shipping damage. If you suspect
the system was damaged in shipment, contact your
Agilent representative.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-2


Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System

Uncrating The This section contains: The customer should removed the tri-wall box from the
pallet. The Agilent CE will uncrate the system pallets.
System ■ Uncrating an Agilent 3070 Series I System, 9-3
The systems are shipped on pallets as described in Table
9-1.

Table 9-1 System Shipping Pallets

System Type Pallets


317X Series I One pallet — Testhead only
307X Series I One pallet — Testhead and Support Bay on same pallet
317X Series II / 3 One pallet — Testhead only
307X Series II / 3 Two pallets — Testhead and Support Bay or Quick Verify on separate pallets
327X Series II / 3 One pallet — Testhead only
79000 One pallet — Testhead only

Leave the smaller boxes intact for the Agilent


representative to unpack when the system is installed. WARNING

Uncrating an Agilent 3070 Series I System ✸Follow the unpacking instructions carefully and
do not work alone. A fully loaded 307X Series I
system with the shipping pallet might weigh 725
Refer to Figure 9-1 on page 9-4 for uncrating a 307X kilograms (1600 pounds). A fully loaded 307X
system and Figure 9-2 on page 9-5 for uncrating a 317X Series II or a 317X system with the shipping pallet
system. might weigh 455 kilograms (1000 pounds).

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-3


Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System

Figure 9-1 307X Series I pallet

Step 6

Steps 9 and 10

Remove Support
Bay brackets with Remove Testhead Brackets
6-mm hex wrench with 5-mm hex driver wrench

Remove all four pallet support bolts and all


Remove 3.5 inch bolts with the sixteen bracket bolts from the pallet with the
9/16-inch open-end wrench 9/16-inch open-wrench or a socket

inst17.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-4


Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System

Figure 9-2 307X, 327X Series I pallet

Step 6

Steps 9 and 10

Remove Testhead brackets


with 5-mm hex wrench

Remove 3.5-inch bolts with the Remove all four pallet support bolts and all eight bracket bolts
9/16-inch open-end wrench from the pallet with the 9/16-inch open-wrench or a socket

inst18.wpg

Tools Needed to Uncrate the System: Uncrating Procedure:


■ A floor jack to lift the system The system is shipped with a 9/16-inch open-end
■ Two people to remove the system, preferably wrench and a 5-millimeter hex wrench. 307X systems
more also includes a 6-millimeter hex wrench for the removal
■ One pair of diagonal cutters or wire cutters of the support bay shipping brackets.
■ Safety glasses
1 If you have a long floor jack (two meters or six feet
long), use it on the RAMP END to move the pallet.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-5


Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System

If you have only small floor jacks, you may find it they do not, make sure the feet are perpendicular to
easier to move the big pallet with one floor jack on the ramp when you lower the ramp to the floor.
each end.
The bag labeled "See Inside" that contains
2 Place the pallet so that the system has room to roll off installation instructions also contains the hex wrench
to the side. The proper side of the system is where or wrenches (5 millimeter for the testhead and 6
you can see the "RAMP END" label. Leave three millimeter for the support bay if included) and the
meters (10 feet) of clearance at the rear of the pallet 9/16-inch open-end wrench.
for the system to roll off into. This clearance
provides sufficient room for the people who are NOTE
handling the system.
Save the installation procedure that is packed with
the system for the Agilent representative to use
WARNING when your system is installed.
✸The straps are stretched tight and will whip when
cut. To avoid injury from flying straps, stand
clear of the straps when you cut them, and always 6 With the 9/16-inch open-end wrench, remove the two
wear eye protection! 3.5-inch bolts that go through the bottom of the pallet
into the two-inch by six-inch board that holds the
ramp.
3 With diagonal cutters, cut the straps that hold the
cardboard box on the pallet. NOTE
4 Remove the plywood board from the top of the box. Since the pallet feet only allow sufficient room to
Then remove the box. remove the 3.5-inch bolts with a box or open-end
wrench, you should not attempt to remove these
NOTE bolts with a 9/16-inch socket wrench.
The Agilent Customer Engineer (CE) will
complete the remainder of this procedure. 7 Make sure the ramp feet are in their proper positions,
and then lower the ramp to the ground.
5 Cut the interior strap on the ramp. After you have cut 8 Remove the plastic bags and foam padding from the
the strap, the feet of the ramp should swing out. If tester.
9 Retrieve the hex wrenches shipped with the system to
help you unbolt the shipping brackets from the tester.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-6


Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System

Using the 5-millimeter hex wrench, remove all the


bolts that fasten the brackets to the testhead. Remove WARNING
the brackets from the pallet with the 9/16-inch
open-end wrench or a socket wrench. ✸Use at least two people to roll the tester off of the
pallet. For a 307X system, one person should
steady the two bays as the second pushes them
10 If you have a 307X system, push the testhead away
down the ramp.
from the support bay to provide better access to the
support bay’s shipping brackets. Remove the bolts
connecting the support bay to the brackets with the Be careful not to push against the plastic skirt that
6-millimeter hex wrench. Remove the remaining surrounds the modules of the testhead.
bolts from the support bay brackets with the
9/16-inch open-end wrench or a socket wrench. 13 Discard all the packing material and the pallet, unless
you anticipate shipping the system to another facility.
11 With the 9/16-inch open-end wrench or a socket
wrench, remove the four seven-inch bolts that
stabilize the deck of the pallet. This prevents the
casters from catching on them when you roll the
system off of the pallet.
12 Before rolling the system off of the pallet:
■ Clear all people, tools, and equipment from the
area that the system will roll into.
■ Make sure the leveling feet for both the testhead
and support bay, if included, are up. Otherwise,
the feet may drag against the pallet and bend.
■ For a 307X system, replace the foam that was
placed between the testhead and the support bay
to prevent scratching and denting of the cabinets.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-7


Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System

Uncrating an Agilent 3070 Series II/3 and Agilent 2 Remove two 150-millimeter (6-inch) bolts from a
79000 System plastic bag attached to the ramp.
3 Figure 9-3: Remove the “Removable End” board
WARNING from the pallet:

✸The testhead weighs approximately 454 kilograms


(1000 pounds). To avoid personal injury, follow
a Remove bolts 1 through 4 from the sides and
bottom of the pallet.
these instructions carefully and do not work alone.
b Remove bolts 5 and 6 from the platform.
The shipping straps are stretched taut and will
whip when cut. Wear eye protection when cutting
straps.

In uncrating the testhead, you will roll the testhead


down a ramp from one end of the pallet. To do this you
will need an area approximately 8 feet (2.5 meters) wide
by 18 feet (5.5 meters) long.

Tools Needed to Uncrate the Testhead


■ Utility knife
■ Cordless drill with hex power shank from
Agilent/MTBU
■ 9/16-inch and 3/4-inch sockets with ratchet and
6-inch (150-millimeter) extension

Uncrating Procedure
1 Cut the strap around the ramp. Lift the ramp off the
pallet and set it aside. Remove the plastic bag
covering the testhead and discard it. Discard all
packing materials.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-8


Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System

Figure 9-3 Removing the bolts from the end board

6
5 Testhead

4
1 Removable End

Remove 6 Bolts 3
2 UNCRAT1.WPG

4 Figure 9-4: Using a cordless drill with hex power 6 Figure 9-4: After removing the foam blocks, screw
shank and 3/4-inch socket, screw the bolts from step the 6-inch bolts up (counter-clockwise) to lower the
2 into the nuts on the shipping brackets on the end of platform all the way down onto the pallet.
the pallet from which you removed the end board. Alternately lower each side a little at a time. Then
Screw the bolts down (clockwise) until the platform remove the 6-inch bolts.
rises slightly.
5 Figure 9-4: Remove two foam blocks from the space
between the platform and pallet.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-9


Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System

Figure 9-4 Raising and lowering the platform

6-inch bolt Use cordless


drill, extension power shank
and 3/4-inch impact socket
or 3/4-inch wrench
Testhead
Shipping
Bracket

Platform
Pallet
Note: The 6-inch bolt
contacts a metal plate
on the pallet. Foam Block U NCRAT2.WPG

7 Figure 9-5: Place the ramp on the pallet. Ensure that


the feet under the ramp are folded down to the floor.
Place two bolts that you removed from the sides of
the pallet in step 3 through the holes in the ramp to
keep the ramp from sliding off the pallet.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-10


Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System

Figure 9-5 Attaching the ramp

T esthead
Platform
Bolt Foot
Ra m p

U NC RA T3.W PG

8 Remove all four shipping brackets from the testhead


and pallet.
9 Roll the testhead down the ramp and onto the floor.

NOTE
Advise the customer to save the pallet, ramp, and
shipping materials in case the customer needs to
ship the system to another facility. The only safe
way to ship the testhead is using the pallet and
shipping materials provided.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-11


Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System

Uncrating the Support Bay

WARNING

✸The Support Bay weighs approximately 209


kilograms (460 pounds). To avoid personal injury,
follow these instructions carefully and do not
work alone. The shipping straps are stretched taut
and will whip when cut. Wear eye protection
when cutting straps.

In uncrating the Support Bay, you will roll the Support


Bay down a ramp from the pallet. To do this you will
need an area approximately 6 feet (2 meters) wide by 13
feet (4 meters) long.

Tools Needed to Uncrate the Support Bay:


■ Utility knife
■ 7/16-inch socket with ratchet
■ 9/16-inch socket with ratchet

Uncrating Procedure:
1 Remove the ramp and packing material from the top
of the Support Bay and remove the packing material
from around the outside of the Support Bay.
2 Figure 9-6: Remove the two shippin clamps (one on
each side) from the bottom of the Support Bay (1, 2).

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-12


Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System

Figure 9-6 Removing the shipping hardware

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-13


Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System

3 Figure 9-7: Remove the two bolts from each corner ramp locks into the edge of the pallet. Then roll the
(1) and pull the block out from under the bay (2). bay down the ramp (3).
Position the ramp so the block of wood under the

Figure 9-7 Installing the ramp

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-14


Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Placing The System

Placing The System Moving the Testhead and Support Bay


Make sure all leveling feet are turned up as high as they
go before rolling the system.
Place the system exactly as the system plan drawing
shows. Remember that the testhead will be rotated up
for service and that cable length will be critical.

Immobilizing and Leveling the System


Immobilize and level all bays by screwing the leveling
feet down to the floor. The testhead may be difficult to
unlock or rotate if it is not level.
If local building codes require equipment to be anchored
to the floor due to potential seismic activity
(earthquakes), you will need to bolt the system to the
floor. The shipping brackets used to secure the system
to the pallet are suitable for this purpose, but you will
need to supply fasteners suitable for your situation.
If you are installing an 44990A EFS Board Handler into
an automated test cell, the integration specialist will
need to bolt the testhead to the floor. Refer to the
44990A EFS Board Handler Manual, 44990-90004, for
more information.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-15


Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Re-shipping a 3070 and 79000 System

Re-shipping a 3070 When it becomes necessary to pack and ship a 3070 / Knowledge Center (MSKC). In the U.S. call
79000 system to another location, Agilent can help. 1-800-593-6635 with your MSKC support handle.
and 79000 System You can either purchase an Agilent Move, which Outside the U.S. call your local Agilent Service
includes Agilent personnel disassembling, packing, Representative to access the MSKC.
shipping, and setting up the system at the new location;
or you can purchase a shipping kit from Agilent, which WARNING
includes the pallet and other materials required to ship a
3070 system. ✸When re-shipping a support or instrument bay,
DO NOT use the ramp to move the bay onto the
As when a system is installed, when a system is moved, pallet to avoid possible injury due to the bay
the procedures should be performed by an tipping over on you. The ramp is designed for
Agilent-trained technician. The Shipment Kit part removal of the bay only. Instead, use a hoist and
numbers are listed in Table 9-2 and Table 9-3. attach to the hooks on the top of the bay and lift
the bay onto the pallet.
Other Shipment Kits were being designed at the time of
this printing. To order or inquire about a Shipment Kit
in the U.S. contact Agilent’s Measurement System

Table 9-2 Shipment kit special option product numbers

Testhead Support Bay POTS Bay Controller


Series I 307X, 317X 44813A Opt. 555 n/a 44813A Opt. 551
(Testhead and (19-in. Bay)
Support Bay Pallet)
Series II 307X, 317X 44813A Opt. 565 44813A Opt. 567 44813A Opt. 567 n/a
Series II 327X 44813A Opt. 566 n/a 44813A Opt. 567 n/a
Series 3 307X, 317X, 44813A Opt. 570 44813A Opt. 572 44813A Opt. 572 n/a
3070 (Win), 790001
Series 3 327X, 327X (Win) 44813A Opt. 571 n/a 44813A Opt. 572 n/a
1. 3070 MS Windows system must use a pallet received after March 2000.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-16


Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Re-shipping a 3070 and 79000 System

Table 9-3 Board handler shipment kit special option product numbers

Product Number
44990A EFS Board Handler 44813A Opt. 560

Special Option to Part Number Listing


44813A Opt. 555 = 03066-69901
44813A Opt. 560 = 44990-85200
44813A Opt. 565 = E4000-69901
44813A Opt. 566 = E4000-69902
44813A Opt. 567 = E4000-69903
44813A Opt. 570 = E9900-69901
44813A Opt. 571 = E9997-69901
44813A Opt. 572 = E9900-69902

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-17


10 Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older
Systems
03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... ■ Introduction, 10-2

■ Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior


to May 2001), 10-5

■ Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior


to May 2000), 10-78

■ Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II), 10-109

■ Connecting Mains Power To The System, 10-143

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-1


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Introduction

Introduction This chapter provides power requirements and wiring There are two easy ways to determine whether you have
information for older Agilent 3070 family systems. This a Series I or a Series II system: The Series II system has
includes systems that used earlier models of power the "Series II" logo printed on the front of the testhead,
distribution units (PDUs). and it has the wide pods (integrated cabinets) on both
sides of the testhead. See Figure 10-1 on page 10-4 to
The E1135A/B PDU is no longer manufactured; the
identify where the power distribution unit (PDU) or
E1135C replaced it.
power distribution kit (PDK) is located on your system.
Power is connected to both E1135A and E1135B the Figure 10-1 shows the rear views of the older 3070 and
same way. The power connections are very similar for 3070 Series II family testheads and support bays.
the E1135C, except the input power is connected to a
Following are important points to note about Figure
mains disconnect switch. If you want information on a
10-1:
current Series 3 systems, see Chapter 6, Site
Preparation – Power Requirements. ■ The 317X Series I system is the only one that uses
the E1170-80003 PDK. The PDK has the same
CAUTION functionality as the older E1099A PDU, but is
re-packaged to fit in the testhead (see the 3070
✸The wire sizes recommended in this chapter are
for the SO cord from the receptacle to the system.
Theory & Repair Manual, Chapter 4,
E4000-90120, for details).
The electrician has the responsibility to size the
service to the receptacle so that the voltage drop The 307X Series I system is the only one that uses
from the source to the 3070 system does not two E1131A PDUs or one 44940A/B or E1099A
exceed 5-percent of the nominal voltage. in the support bay; there is no PDU in the 307X
Series I testhead. Each PDU requires its own ac
mains supply.
NOTE ■ The older 317X Series II and 307X Series II
If a replacement E1135C is being installed and the systems use the E1131A PDU. The 307X Series
recommended conductor size is greater than 10 II system has one PDU in the testhead cabinet and
square millimeters (#8 AWG), which is the largest another in the support bay.
conductor size that will easily fit in the E1135C ■ The 307X Series I system is the only one that uses
PDU, see the section Connecting a Pigtail to the two E1135A/B PDUs in the support bay; there is
E1135C PDU on page 11-84. no PDU in the 307X testhead. Each PDU requires
its own ac mains supply.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-2


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Introduction

■ The 317X Series II and 307X Series II systems


use the E1135B PDU. Some 307X Series II
systems have one PDU in the testhead cabinet and
another in the support bay or Quick Verify
cabinet. Each PDU requires its own ac mains
supply.
■ The 327X Series II system uses one E1135B PDU
in the testhead.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-3


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Introduction
Figure 10-1 Rear views of the 3070 / Series II family systems

317X Series I Testhead

E1170-80003 PDK

307X Series I Testhead with Support Bay


PDU #2 (Branch):
E1135A or
E1135B

PDU #1 (Main):
E1135A or
E1135B

317X Series II Testhead 327X Series II Testhead

Port2
Port3

0ut In

E1135A or E1135B PDU E1135B or E1135C PDU (Main)

307X Series II Testhead with Support Bay


View with rear
door open

SYS_ID.WPG
E1135A or E1135B PDU (Main) E1135A or E1135B PDU (Branch)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-4


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Series 3 Power This section contains: Used by North America. Receptacle available
locally.
Requirements and ■ Sizing the Input Wires and Circuit Breakers, 10-5
E1135-61610 - uses 5x6 mm2 5-conductor cord
Connections (Prior ■ Series 3 / 79000 Power Distribution, 10-9

with a IEC 60309 plug and mating receptacle.
to May 2001) ■ 327X 1-Module System AC Outlets, 10-17 Used Internationally.
■ 79000 - 1-Module System AC System, 10-28

■ 317X 2-Module System AC Outlets, 10-39

■ 307X 4-Module 1-PDU System AC Outlets, 10-50

■ 307X 4-Module 2-PDU System AC Outlets, 10-60

■ E2195/E2197A xDSL/POTS Bay AC Outlets, 10-67

Sizing the Input Wires and Circuit Breakers


All 3070 and 3070PC systems should be installed with
a 30-amp breaker or fuse in each phase of the incoming
power. The modules and instruments in the testhead are
protected by circuit breakers or fuses in the power
distribution unit.
Table 10-1 on page 10-6 shows the Full Load Amp
(FLA) for each system type and for each 3-phase power
option.
Table 10-2 on page 10-7 shows FLA for each system
type and for each single-phase power options.
One of two different power cords and plugs are attached
to each 3-phase system, depending on the country where
the system will be installed:
■ E1135-61611 - uses #10 AWG 5-conductor cord
with NEMA plug that mates with NEMA L21-30.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-5


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Table 10-1 Series 3 and 79000 family power requirements (3-phase power)

E1135C Power Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2


327X 790003 317X 307X 3-phase 1-phase
xDSL/POTS xDSL/POTS
Bay Bay4
Opts/Current
3-Phase Wye w/ Neutral AWW5 120 / 208 13 14 18 24 12 AWV, 16
L1 05E5 or 6 127 / 220 13 14 18 24 12 AWZ, 16
0E56 220 / 380 9 10 10 16 10 05M, 14
05L6 230 / 400 9 10 10 16 10 05F, 14
N
0E76 240 / 415 9 10 10 16 10 05J, 14
L2 L3
G

3-phase Delta 0ED6 200 13 14 18 24 12 AWY, 16

L3 L2 05C5 or 6 220 13 14 18 24 12 0E3, 16


05H5 or 6 230 13 14 18 24 12 03G, 16
0E65 or 6 240 13 14 18 24 12 0EH, 16

L1
G
1. Calculated with a fully-loaded 3X7X system with 3 STC cards in every module.
2. DUT Power supplies are configured for 200-240 volts ac.
Calculated with 6 STC cards in the module.
3.
POTS and xDSL bays always require a separate power drop. Use the POTS/xDSL power option that is on the same line as the E1135C power option.
4.
Use E1135-61611 power cord with NEMA L21-30 receptacle/connector body.
5.
Use E1135-61610 power cord with IEC 60309 32A 3-phase receptacle/connector body (included with the system)
6.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-6


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Table 10-2 Series 3 and 79000 family power requirements (single-phase power)

E1135C Power Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2


327X 79000 317X 307X Support Bay xDSL/POTS
Testhead Bay3
Opts/Current
Single-Phase Wye w/ AWV 120 / 208 17 19 20 24 15 AWY, 16
Neutral
AWZ 127 / 220 17 19 20 24 15 AWZ, 16
L1 L2 05B 220 / 380 11 10 12 22 NA 05M, 14
05G 230 / 400 11 10 12 22 NA 05F, 14
05K 240 / 415 11 10 12 22 NA 05J, 14
N
G
Single-Phase Earthed 05M 220 19 20 24 24 15 14

L1 05F 230 19 20 24 24 15 14
05J 240 19 20 24 24 15 14

N
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-7


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Table 10-2 Series 3 and 79000 family power requirements (single-phase power) (continued)

E1135C Power Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2


327X 79000 317X 307X Support Bay xDSL/POTS
Testhead Bay
Opts/Current
Single-Phase AWX 200 19 20 24 24 15 AWY, 16
Non-Earthed
0EB 220 19 20 24 24 15 0E3, 14
L1 0EJ 230 19 20 24 24 15 0EG, 14

L2
G
0EC 240 19 20 24 24 15 0EH, 14
Single-Phase AWY 100 / 200 19 20 24 24 15 16
Center-Tap Neutral
0E3 110 / 220 19 20 24 24 15 14
L1 0EG 115 / 230 19 20 24 24 15 14

N
L2
G 0EH 120 / 240 19 20 24 24 15 14
1. Calculated with a fully-loaded 3X7X system with 3 STC cards in every module.
2. DUT Power supplies are configured for 200-240 volts ac.
3. POTS and xDSL bays always require a separate power drop. Use the POTS/xDSL power option that is on the same line as the system power option.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-8


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Series 3 / 79000 Power Distribution


To move a system to a location that requires a different
power option, you may need to reconfigure the PDU and
change where equipment is plugged in.
Find the section in Table 10-3 on page 10-10 (3-phase
power) or Table 10-4 on page 10-13 (single-phase
power) that describes:
■ Your new system power option
■ System type (the number of modules)
■ Location of outlets
■ Number of PDUs, as well as the figure page
number which describes your power option wiring

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-9


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Table 10-3 Series 3 and 79000 family wiring diagram (3-phase power)

E1135C
Power
Option Voltage Testhead
327X Outlet 79000 Outlet 317X Outlet 307X Outlet 3-phase 1-phase
Locations Locations Locations Locations xDSL/POTS xDSL/POTS
Figure 10-2 on Figure 10-13 Figure 10-24 Figure 10-35 Bay Outlet Bay1
page 10-17 on page 10-28 on page 10-39 on page 10-50 locations Opts/Current
Figure 10-53 Figure 10-52
on page 10-69 on page 10-68

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-10


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Table 10-3 Series 3 and 79000 family wiring diagram (3-phase power) (continued)

E1135C
Power
Option Voltage Testhead
3-Phase Wye w/ Neutral AWW 120 / Figure 10-3 on Figure 10-14 Figure 10-25 Figure 10-36 Figure 10-54 AWV, Figure
208 page 10-18 on page 10-29 on page 10-40 on page 10-51, on page 10-70 10-58 on
L1
Figure 10-38 page 10-74
on page 10-53
05E 127 / Figure 10-3 on Figure 10-14 Figure 10-25 Figure 10-36 Figure 10-54 AWZ, Figure
N 220 page 10-18 on page 10-29 on page 10-40 on page 10-51, on page 10-70 10-58 on
Figure 10-38 page 10-74
L2 L3 on page 10-53
G
0E5 220 / Figure 10-5 on Figure 10-16 Figure 10-27 Figure 10-39 Figure 10-55 05M, Figure
380 page 10-20 on page 10-31 on page 10-42 on page 10-54, on page 10-71 10-60 on
Figure 10-41 page 10-76
on page 10-56
05L 230 / Figure 10-5 on Figure 10-16 Figure 10-27 Figure 10-39 Figure 10-55 05F, Figure
400 page 10-20 on page 10-31 on page 10-42 on page 10-54, on page 10-71 10-60 on
Figure 10-41 page 10-76
on page 10-56
0E7 240 / Figure 10-5 on Figure 10-16 Figure 10-27 Figure 10-39 Figure 10-55 05J, Figure
415 page 10-20 on page 10-31 on page 10-42 on page 10-54, on page 10-71 10-60 on
Figure 10-41 page 10-76
on page 10-56

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-11


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Table 10-3 Series 3 and 79000 family wiring diagram (3-phase power) (continued)

E1135C
Power
Option Voltage Testhead
3-phase Delta 0ED 200 Figure 10-3 on Figure 10-14 Figure 10-25 Figure 10-36 Figure 10-54 AWY, Figure
page 10-18 on page 10-29 on page 10-40 on page 10-51, on page 10-70 10-58 on
L3 L2 Figure 10-38 page 10-74
on page 10-53
05C 220 Figure 10-3 on Figure 10-14 Figure 10-25 Figure 10-36 Figure 10-54 0E3, Figure
page 10-18 on page 10-29 on page 10-40 on page 10-51, on page 10-70 10-58 on
Figure 10-38 page 10-74
L1 on page 10-53
G
05H 230 Figure 10-3 on Figure 10-14 Figure 10-25 Figure 10-36 Figure 10-54 0EG, Figure
page 10-18 on page 10-29 on page 10-40 on page 10-51, on page 10-70 10-58 on
Figure 10-38 page 10-74
on page 10-53
0E6 240 Figure 10-3 on Figure 10-14 Figure 10-25 Figure 10-36 Figure 10-54 0EH, Figure
page 10-18 on page 10-29 on page 10-40 on page 10-51, on page 10-70 10-58 on
Figure 10-38 page 10-74
on page 10-53
1. POTS and xDSL bays always require a separate power drop. For the standard 3-phase power options with supplied power cord use the first column. If sin-
gle-phase is absolutely required, use the options in the second column that is on the same line as the system power option. Rewiring of the PDU may be
required.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-12


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Table 10-4 Series 3 and 79000 family wiring diagram (single-phase power)

E1135C
Power
Option Voltage Testhead
307X outlet locations Figure xDSL/POTS
327X outlet 79000 outlet 317X outlet 10-45 on page 10-60 Bay1
locations locations locations Opts/Current
Figure 10-2 on Figure 10-13 Figure 10-24 Figure 10-52
page 10-17 on page 10-28 on page 10-39 Testhead Support Bay on page 10-68
Single-Phase Wye w/ AWV 120 / Figure 10-7 on Figure 10-18 Figure 10-29 Figure 10-46 Figure 10-48 AWV, Figure
Neutral 208 page 10-22 on page 10-33 on page 10-44 on page 10-61 on page 10-63 10-58 on
page 10-74
L1 L2
AWZ 127 / Figure 10-7 on Figure 10-18 Figure 10-29 Figure 10-46 Figure 10-48 AWZ, Figure
220 page 10-22 on page 10-33 on page 10-44 on page 10-61 on page 10-63 10-58 on
page 10-74
05B 220 / Figure 10-9 on Figure 10-20 Figure 10-31 Figure 10-42 05M, Figure
N 380 page 10-24 on page 10-35 on page 10-46 on page 10-57, 10-60 on
G Figure 10-44 page 10-76
on page 10-59
05G 230 / Figure 10-9 on Figure 10-20 Figure 10-31 Figure 10-42 05F, Figure
400 page 10-24 on page 10-35 on page 10-46 on page 10-57, 10-60 on
Figure 10-44 page 10-76
on page 10-59
05K 240 / Figure 10-9 on Figure 10-20 Figure 10-31 Figure 10-42 05J, Figure
415 page 10-24 on page 10-35 on page 10-46 on page 10-57, 10-60 on
Figure 10-44 page 10-76
on page 10-59

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-13


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Table 10-4 Series 3 and 79000 family wiring diagram (single-phase power) (continued)

E1135C
Power
Option Voltage Testhead
Single-Phase Earthed 05M 220 Figure 10-11 Figure 10-22 Figure 10-33 Figure 10-49 Figure 10-51 Figure 10-60
on page 10-26 on page 10-37 on page 10-48 on page 10-64 on page 10-66 on page 10-76
L1
05F 230 Figure 10-11 Figure 10-22 Figure 10-33 Figure 10-49 Figure 10-51 Figure 10-60
on page 10-26 on page 10-37 on page 10-48 on page 10-64 on page 10-66 on page 10-76
05J 240 Figure 10-11 Figure 10-22 Figure 10-33 Figure 10-49 Figure 10-51 Figure 10-60
on page 10-26 on page 10-37 on page 10-48 on page 10-64 on page 10-66 on page 10-76
N
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-14


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Table 10-4 Series 3 and 79000 family wiring diagram (single-phase power) (continued)

E1135C
Power
Option Voltage Testhead
307X outlet locations xDSL/POTS
327X outlet 79000 outlet 317X outlet Figure 10-45 on page 10-60 Bay
locations locations locations Opts/Current
Figure 10-2 on Figure 10-13 Figure 10-24 Figure 10-52
page 10-17 on page 10-28 on page 10-39 Testhead Support Bay on page 10-68
Single-Phase AWY, Figure
Non-Earthed Figure 10-7 on Figure 10-18 Figure 10-29 Figure 10-46 Figure 10-48 10-58 on
AWX 200 page 10-22 on page 10-33 on page 10-44 on page 10-61 on page 10-63 page 10-74
L1
0E3, Figure
Figure 10-7 on Figure 10-18 Figure 10-29 Figure 10-46 Figure 10-48 10-58 on
0EB 220 page 10-22 on page 10-33 on page 10-44 on page 10-61 on page 10-63 page 10-74
0EG, Figure
L2 Figure 10-7 on Figure 10-18 Figure 10-29 Figure 10-46 Figure 10-48 10-58 on
G 0EJ 230 page 10-22 on page 10-33 on page 10-44 on page 10-61 on page 10-63 page 10-74
0EH, Figure
Figure 10-7 on Figure 10-18 Figure 10-29 Figure 10-46 Figure 10-48 10-58 on
0EC 240 page 10-22 on page 10-33 on page 10-44 on page 10-61 on page 10-63 page 10-74

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-15


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Table 10-4 Series 3 and 79000 family wiring diagram (single-phase power) (continued)

E1135C
Power
Option Voltage Testhead
Single-Phase Center-Tap AWY 100 / Figure 10-7 on Figure 10-18 Figure 10-29 Figure 10-46 Figure 10-48 Figure 10-58
Neutral 200 page 10-22 on page 10-33 on page 10-44 on page 10-61 on page 10-63 on page 10-74

L1 0E3 110 / Figure 10-7 on Figure 10-18 Figure 10-29 Figure 10-46 Figure 10-48 Figure 10-58
220 page 10-22 on page 10-33 on page 10-44 on page 10-63 on page 10-74

N 0EG 115 / Figure 10-7 on Figure 10-18 Figure 10-29 Figure 10-46 Figure 10-48 Figure 10-58
230 page 10-22 on page 10-33 on page 10-44 on page 10-61 on page 10-63 on page 10-74
L2 0EH 120 / Figure 10-7 on Figure 10-18 Figure 10-29 Figure 10-46 Figure 10-48 Figure 10-58
240 page 10-22 on page 10-33 on page 10-44 on page 10-61 on page 10-63 on page 10-74
G
1. POTS and xDSL bays always require a separate power drop. Use the POTS/xDSL power options that is on the same line as the system power option.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-16


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

327X 1-Module System AC Outlets

Figure 10-2 327X 1-module system

Outlet 2 Outlet 3

Outlet 1

Testhead (Rear View)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-17


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-3 327X 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6

32LLL.wpg
Unswitched
(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-18
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-4 327X 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-19


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-5 327X 0E5, 05L, 0E7

Unswitched 32LLLN.wpg
(Fused)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-20


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-6 327X 0E5, 05L, 0E7

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-21


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-7 327X AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH

Unswitched 32LL.wpg
(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-22
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-8 327X AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-23


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-9 327X 05B, 05G, 05K

Unswitched 32LLN.wpg
(Fused)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-24


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-10 327X 05B, 05G, 05K

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-25


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-11 327X 05M, 05F, 05J

Unswitched 32LN.wpg
(Fused)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-26


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-12 327X 05M, 05F, 05J

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-27


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

79000 - 1-Module System AC System

Figure 10-13 79000 1-module system

Outlet 2

Outlet 1
Outlet 3

Testhead (Rear View) E2190_ol.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-28


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-14 79000 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6

Unswitched 79LLL.wpg
(Fused)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-29


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-15 79000 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-30


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-16 79000 0E5, 05L, 0E7

Unswitched 79LLLN.wpg
(Fused)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-31


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-17 79000 0E5, 05L, 0E7

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-32


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-18 79000 AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH

Unswitched 79LL.wpg
(Fused)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-33


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-19 79000 AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-34


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-20 79000 05B, 05G, 05K

T1 T2 T3

79K LLN.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-35


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-21 79000 05B, 05G, 05K

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-36


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-22 79000 05M, 05F, 05J

79KLN.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-37


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-23 79000 05M, 05F, 05J

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-38


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

317X 2-Module System AC Outlets

Figure 10-24 317X 2-module system

Outlet 0 Outlet 2

Outlet 1 Outlet 3

Testhead (Rear View)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-39


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-25 317X 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6

CHECK COUNTRY CODE


FOR FREQUENCY

Unswitched 31LLL.wpg
(Fused)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-40


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-26 317X 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-41


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-27 317X 0E5, 05L, 0E7

CHECK COUNTRY CODE


FOR FREQUENCY

Unswitched 31LLLN.wpg
(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-42
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-28 317X 0E5, 05L, 0E7

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-43


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-29 317X AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH

Unswitched 31LL.wpg
(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-44
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-30 317X AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-45


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-31 317X 05B, 05G, 05K

Unswitched 31LLN.wpg
(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-46
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-32 317X 05B, 05G, 05K

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-47


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-33 317X 05M, 05F, 05J

Unswitched 31LN.wpg
(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-48
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-34 317X 05M, 05F, 05J

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-49


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

307X 4-Module 1-PDU System AC Outlets

Figure 10-35 307X 4-module 1-PDU system

Outlet 0 Outlet 2

Outlet 1 Outlet 3

Support Bay Testhead (Rear View)


(Rear View)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-50


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-36 3070 1-PDU 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6

CHECK COUNTRY CODE


FOR FREQUENCY

Unswitched 30LLL_1.wpg
(Fused)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-51


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-37 3070 1-PDU 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-52


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-38 3070 1-PDU 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6 (support bay)

30LLL_2.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-53


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-39 3070 1-PDU 0E5, 05L, 0E7

Unswitched 30LLLN_1.wpg
(Fused)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-54


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-40 3070 1-PDU 0E5, 05L, 0E7

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-55


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-41 3070 1-PDU 0E5, 05L, 0E7 (support bay)

30LLLN_2.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-56


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-42 3070 1-PDU 05B, 05G, 05K

Unswitched 30LLN_1.wpg
(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-57
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-43 3070 1-PDU 05B, 05G, 05K

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-58


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-44 3070 1-PDU 05B, 05G, 05K (support bay)

30LLN_2.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-59


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

307X 4-Module 2-PDU System AC Outlets Since each of these options are single-phase, which
outlet a DUT power supply connects to does not affect
Beginning with the release of Series 3, with 4-module the load balance, but knowing where each power supply
2-PDU systems, the DUT power supplies are connected is plugged in helps when servicing the system.
directly to the E1135C PDU, and there are no outlet
boxes in the Support Bay, as shown in Figure 10-45.

Figure 10-45 307X 4-module 2-PDU system

Outlet 0 Outlet 2
8 7 6 5
See Table
To Gnd

4 3 2 1
See Table

See Table
Main
To Gnd
See Table

Branch
Outlet 1 Outlet 3
PDU
Support Bay Testhead (Rear View)
(Rear View)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-60


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-46 3070 2-PDU AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0E3, 0EJ, 0EG, 0EC, 0EH

CHECK COUNTRY CODE


FOR FREQUENCY

Unswitched 30LL_1.wpg
(Fused)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-61


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-47 3070 2-PDU AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0E3, 0EJ, 0EG, 0EC, 0EH

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-62


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-48 3070 2-PDU AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0E3, 0EJ, 0EG, 0EC, 0EH (support bay)

CHECK COUNTRY CODE


FOR FREQUENCY

30LL_2.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-63


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-49 3070 2-PDU 05M, 05F, 05J

Unswitched 30LN_1.wpg
(Fused)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-64


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-50 3070 2-PDU 05M, 05F, 05J

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-65


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-51 3070 2-PDU 05M, 05F, 05J (support bay)

30LN_2.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-66


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

E2195/E2197A xDSL/POTS Bay AC Outlets


The instruments in the xDSL/POTS bay, except the
Kikusui power supply, are plugged into the E1135C
PDU.
With the E2197A xDSL/POTS bay the 6811B ringer
supply is plugged into the E1135C PDU and the
isolation transformer is removed.
See Communications Test for additional information.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-67


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-52 E2195A xDLS / POTS Bay (shown with POTS options)

Outlet 1 - Customer Instruments

8 7 6 5
See Table
To Gnd
See Table
4 3 2 1
See Table
To Gnd
See Table

PDU

Line Mains
Filter Input
OTS1 WPG
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-68
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-53 E2197A xDLS / POTS Bay (shown with POTS options)

Outlet 1 - Customer Instruments


200-240
Volts

8 7 6 5
See Table
To G nd
See Table
4 3 2 1
See Table
To Gnd
See Table

PDU

Line Mains
Filter Input

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-69


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-54 E2197A xDLS / POTS Bay AWW, 0ED, 05C, 05E, 05H, 0E6

Switched

Ringer Supply

E2197LLL.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-70


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-55 E2197A xDLS / POTS Bay 0E5, 05L, 0E7

Switched

Ringer Supply

E2197LLLN.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-71


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-56 E2195A xDLS / POTS Bay AWW, 05E

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-72


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-57 E2195A xDLS / POTS Bay AWW, 05E

Switched

E2195LLLN.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-73


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-58 E2195A xDSL / POTS Bay AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH

E2195LLN.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-74


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-59 E2195A xDSL / POTS Bay AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH

Switched

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-75


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-60 E2195A xDSL / POTS 05M, 05F, 05J

E2195LN.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-76


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)

Figure 10-61 E2195A xDSL / POTS 05M, 05F, 05J

Switched

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-77


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Series 3 Power This section contains: Introduction


Requirements and ■ Introduction, 10-78 This remaining sections of this chapter describe the
Connections (Prior ■ Series 3 / 79000 Power Requirements, 10-80 electrical power requirements for 3070 Series 3 or
79000 family board test systems which have serial
to May 2000) ■ Power Recommentations, 10-82 numbers shown in Table 10-5 and Table 10-6. See
■ Sizing The Input Wires And Circuit Breakers, 10-89 Appendix 10, Connecting Power to the E1135A/B
PDU for systems with serial numbers shown in Table
■ Connecting Power To The Testhead, 10-90
10-7 on page 10-79.
■ “Mains” Wiring Diagrams, 10-101

■ 220/380–240/415 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (0E5, NOTE


05L, 0E7), 10-102 If you are installing a new Agilent 3070 / 79000
■ 220/380–240/415 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral Series 3 system with a serial number higher than
(05B, 05G, 05K), 10-102 those shown below, go to Series 3 Power
Requirements and Connections (Prior to May
■ 120/208–127/220 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (AWW, 2001) on page 10-5.
05E), 10-103

■ 120/208–127/220 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral


(AWV, AWZ), 10-104 NOTE
■ 200-240 3-phase Delta (0ED, 05C, 05H, 0E6), 10-105 The Customer Engineer (CE) who does the
■ 100/200-120/240 V Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral installation has the responsibility of removing the
(AWY, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH), 10-106 testhead from the pallet. Therefore, the system
power cannot be installed until after the CE has
■ 220–240 V Single-Phase Earthed (05M, 05F, 05J), removed the system from the pallet.
10-107

■ 200–240 V Single-Phase Non-Earthed (AWX, 0EB, 0EJ,


0EC), 10-108

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-78


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Table 10-5 Serial numbers of Series 3 / 79000 systems with factory power reconfiguration reduction1 (but without power cords
attached except 327X and 79000 power option AWW)

System Type 79000 327X 317X 307X


Testhead Product E2190A E9997A E9998A E9900A
Serial Number US38050137 and US38240247 and US38240409 and US38240532 and
between US38050120 US38240152 US38240243 US38240240
1. DUTS and Controllers set to 220-240 volt operation and load balanced

Table 10-6 Serial numbers of Series 3 / 79000 systems shipped without power reconfiguration reduction1 (see Chapter 11, Site
Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion for how to reduce current requirements)

System Type 79000 327X 317X 307X


Testhead Product E2190A E9997A E9998A E9900A
Serial Numbers US38050119 and US38240151 and US38240242 and US38240239 and
between US38050109 US38240115 US38240139 US33240114
1. i.e., DUTS and Controllers are set to 100-120 volts.

Table 10-7 Serial numbers of Series 3 / 79000 systems shipped with E1135B PDUs.

System Type 79000 327X 317X 307X


Testhead Product E2190A E9997A E9998A E9900A
Serial Numbers US38050108 and US38240114 and US38240138 and US38240113 and
between US38050100 US38240100 US38240100 US33240100

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-79


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Series 3 / 79000 Power Requirements


NOTE
This section provides minimum power requirements for The loading and wire size information shown
Agilent 3070 / 79000 Series 3 family systems for serial beside the values in brackets [ ] in tables in this
numbers shown in Table 10-5 and Table 10-6 on chapter applies to 3070 / 79000 Series 3 systems
page 10-79. For most installations, these requirements which shipped after June 1999, (Table 10-5) or to
are sufficient. systems reconfigured to match those which
shipped after June 1999.
NOTE
Series 3 systems shipped prior to June 1999
For new 3070 / 79000 Series 3 systems, go to (Table 10-6) can substantially reduce their current
Table 10-1 on page 10-6. requirements, as shown by comparing the values
shown in brackets [ ] in the tables with the values
beside them which are not shown in brackets. The
reduced current requirements can be achieved by
following the recommendations in Chapter 11,
Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current
Reduction Conversion of this manual.
See Chapter 10, Site Preparation – Power
Requirements for Older Systems for Series I, II
power requirements. See the 3070 / 79000 Repair
Manuals, Chapter 1B for the locations where
instruments are plugged in for load balancing for
Series II and Series 3.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-80


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

The 3070 / 79000 family systems with serial numbers


shown in Table 10-5 on page 10-79 (3-phase) and Table
10-6 on page 10-79 (single-phase) require ac electrical
power supplied two ways:
1 AC mains power must be supplied to the system’s
Power Distribution Unit (PDU).
2 For 327X / 79000 systems using wire and breaker
option #AWW, a power cord is supplied already
wired to the PDU; these are the only systems shipped
before May 2000 supplied with a power cord.

Figure 10-62 Opt. #AWW power plug


Agilent makes the following recom-mend ations:

Ground
Neutral

30 A 120/208 V 3-phase male plug


Part number for cord and plug - E1135-61611 for
North America and E1135-61610 internationally.
Cord is Hard Service (SO) Multi-Strand AWG 12/5
Mating receptacle is a NEMA# L21-30
208Plug-20A m p.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-81


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Power Recommentations installation, in areas where it meets local code


requirements, Agilent recommends that you use
Agilent makes the following recommendations: multi-strand wire from a box to the PDU.
■ 3-phase power should be used if it is available. ■ If needed, convenience outlets must be located
■ A separate ac mains service should be provided near the system for external equipment, including
for the test system. for test servers, optional extra equipment bays,
and automation equipment. Locate the outlets
■ Copper wire should be used for the system input. within one meter (three feet) of and directly
■ The service must have a mains disconnect behind the device. See Chapter 3 to plan the
installed adjacent to the system so that power can location of convenience outlets. All convenience
be quickly removed in case of an emergency. The outlets must supply 20 amps at 100–120 volts or
E1135C PDU, used with 3070 Series 3 and 79000 10 amps at 200–240 volts, whichever is
systems, contains a mains disconnect. This input applicable.
mains disconnect switch does not have The power requirements for older 3070 Series 3 and
short-circuit or over-current protection. The 79000 family systems are shown in Table 10-8 on
E1135C output terminals do have both page 10-84 (3-phase) and Table 10-9 on page 10-86
short-circuit and over-current protection. (single-phase). The values shown in brackets [ ] are
■ A 25.4-millimeter (1-inch) hole is provided on the currents when the DUTS and controller are configured
PDU for the electrician to install a cable clamp at 100-120 volts. The other values are currents with the
and power cord. Agilent recommends the use of a DUTS and controller configured for 220-240 volts (See
power cord E1135-61611 - uses #10 AWG Chapter 11, Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000
5-conductor cord with NEMA plug that mates Current Reduction Conversion).
with NEMA L21-30. Used by North America. The maximum current or full-load amps (FLA) assumes
Receptacle available locally. or a hard-wired fully-loaded systems with Serial Test Card power
connection. supplies. Note that the operating frequency range for the
■ The system input power connections on the PDU 3070 / 79000 family systems is 47–63 hertz, with the
are made to an input connector block and the nominal line frequency either 50 hertz or 60 hertz.
ground connection to the chassis. In the E1135C
the power is connected to the mains disconnect
switch and a ground terminal attached to the
chassis. These connectors can accept wire up to
10 square millimeters (#8 AWG). For ease of

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-82


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

CAUTION

✸Ten thermal circuit breakers are located on the


front of the E1135B/C PDU. These circuit
breakers are designed to protect the loads on the
output terminal block. Under normal operation, if
an overload occurs, the rocker on the breaker will
pop to the open position. The rocker can be reset
by pushing it gently back in place. It is necessary
to wait a few minutes for the breaker to cool
before this can be done. A breaker which cannot
be reset may be permanently damaged by a
short-circuit at the load.
These breakers are not switches and must not be
opened by force. If opened by force, permanent
damage will result. Damage caused by
intentionally opening the breaker is not covered
by warranty.

The electrician should use the Full Load Amps (FLA) in


Table 10-8 on page 10-84 for 3-phase and Table 10-9
on page 10-86 for single-phase systems to determine the
conductor size to the power receptacle where the SO
Cord, or service mains, will connect. Then use the
sections Sizing The Input Wires And Circuit
Breakers on page 10-89 and Connecting Power To
The Testhead on page 10-90 to determine the SO Cord
size and breaker size.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-83


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Table 10-8 Series 3 and 79000 family power requirements (3-phase power)

E1135C
Power
Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2
327X / 790003 317X 307X 3-phase 1- phase
xDSL/POTS xDSL/POTS
Testhead Support Bay
Bay Bay4
Opts/Current
3-Phase Wye w/ Neutral AWW 120 / [15]5 14 [23] 18 [42] 28 NA 12 AWV, 16
208
L1
05E 127 / [15] 14 [23] 18 [42] 28 NA 12 AWZ, 16
220
N 0E5 220 / [13] 10 [14] 10 [22] 18 NA 10 05M, 14
380
L2 L3
05L 230 / [13] 10 [14] 10 [22] 18 NA 10 05F, 14
G 400
0E7 240 / [13] 10 [14] 10 [22] 18 NA 10 05J, 14
415
3-phase Delta 0ED 200 [15] 14 [23] 18 [42] 28 NA 12 AWY, 16

L3 L2 05C 220 [15] 14 [23] 18 [42] 28 NA 12 0E3, 16


05H 230 [15] 14 [23] 18 [42] 28 NA 12 03G, 16
0E6 240 [15] 14 [23] 18 [42] 28 NA 12 0EH, 16

L1
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-84


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

1. Calculated with a fully-loaded 3X7X system with 3 STC cards in every module.
2. DUT Power supplies are configured for 200-240 volts ac.
3. Calculated with 6 STC cards in the module.
4. POTS and xDSL bays always require a separate power drop. Use the POTS/xDSL power options that is on the same line as the system power option.
5. Values in brackets [ ] apply to Series 3 systems with serial numbers less than those listed in Table 10-6 on page 10-79.

NOTE
Option #05A is not available on the Corporate
Price List (CPL) after June 1999. The DUT
power supplies input voltage for Japanese systems
are set to 220 volts at the factory and the neutral
center tap is no longer used.
If 3-phase Delta power (0ED) is not available, use
the Single-Phase power option (AWY). 307X
single-phase option AWY systems will require
two power drops.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-85


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Table 10-9 Series 3 and 79000 family power requirements (single-phase power)

E1135C
Power
Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2
327X / 790003 317X 307X xDSL/POTS
Bay4
Testhead Support Bay Opts/Current
Single-Phase Wye w/ AWV 120 / [25]5 20 [43] 24 [42] 28 [24] 15 AWY, 16
Neutral 208

L1 L2 AWZ 127 / [25] 20 [43] 24 [42] 28 [24] 15 AWZ, 16


220
05B 220 / [18] 11 [21] 12 [37] 22 NA 05M, 14
380

N 05G 230 / [18] 11 [21] 12 [37] 22 NA 05F, 14


400
G
05K 240 / [18] 11 [21] 12 [37] 22 NA 05J, 14
415
Single-Phase Earthed 05M 220 [22] 20 [36] 24 [42] 28 [24] 15 14

L1 05F 230 [22] 20 [36] 24 [42] 28 [24] 15 14


05J 240 [22] 20 [36] 24 [42] 28 [24] 15 14

N
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-86


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Table 10-9 Series 3 and 79000 family power requirements (single-phase power) (continued)

E1135C
Power
Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2
327X / 79000 317X 307X xDSL/POTS
Bay
Opts/Current
Single-Phase AWX 200 [NA] 20 [36] 24 [42] 28 [20] 15 AWY, 16
Non-Earthed
0EB 220 [NA] 20 [36] 24 [42] 28 [20] 15 0E3, 14
L1 0EJ 230 [NA] 20 [36] 24 [42] 28 [20] 15 0EG, 14
0EC 240 [NA] 20 [36] 24 [42] 28 [20] 15 0EH, 14

L2
G
Single-Phase Center-Tap AWY 100 / [25] 20 [43] 24 [43] 28 [24] 15 16
Neutral 200

L1 0E3 110 / [25] 20 [43] 24 [43] 28 [24] 15 14


220

N 0EG 115 / [25] 20 [43] 24 [42] 28 [24] 15 14


230
L2 0EH 120 / [25] 20 [43] 24 [42] 28 [24] 15 14
240
G
1. Calculated with a fully-loaded 3X7X system with 3 STC cards in every module.
2. DUT Power supplies are configured for 200-240 volts ac.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-87


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

3. Calculated with 6 STC cards in the module.


4. POTS and xDSL bays always require a separate power drop. Use the POTS/xDSL power options that is the same line as the system power
option.
5. Values in brackets [] apply to Series 3 systems with serial numbers less than those listed in Table 10-6 on page 10-79.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-88


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Sizing The Input Wires And Circuit Breakers


NOTE
To ensure adequate peak voltage for proper operation of The wire sizes recommended in this chapter are
the system power supply, two minimum requirements for the SO cord from the receptacle to the system.
must be met: The electrician has the responsibility to size the
■ A system drop must be connected to an ac source wire to the receptacle so that the voltage drop
with at least the minimum voltage. from the transformer to the Agilent 3070 system
does not exceed 5 percent of the nominal voltage.
■ The wire used for the drop must be sized to handle
rms loads with less than a 5 percent of nominal
voltage drop between the ac source and the The SO power cord conductors between the system
system. power receptacle and the system should be the wire size
listed in Table 10-12 through Table 10-17. This allows
Table 10-10 on page 10-91 (3-phase) and Table 10-11
for easy manageability when connecting to the PDU.
on page 10-92 (single-phase) directs you to another
table listing the correct wire sizes and also to the correct The wire sizes from the transformer to the receptacle are
wiring diagams for each power option. the responsibility of the electrician.
Using a wire that is too small can cause a larger voltage After locating the correct wire size and breaker size in
drop from the transformer to the 3070 system. This the following tables, return to Connecting Power To
could mean that the peak voltage into the PDU is not The Testhead on page 10-90 for drawings showing how
sufficient for proper operation. If the ac source provides to connect the power to the PDU.
more than the minimum voltage, then the maximum
voltage loss between the source and the system is not as
critical.

CAUTION

✸All power configurations using a neutral are


unbalanced, so there will be neutral current.
Therefore, the neutral conductor must be the same
size as the phase conductors.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-89


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Connecting Power To The Testhead


WARNING
The power options available for Agilent 3070 Series 3 /
79000 with E1135C PDUs are shown in Table 10-10 on
page 10-91.
✺Hazardous voltages, capable of causing injury or
death, are present inside the PDU as long as
"mains" power is connected.
After following the lock-out, tag-out procedure,1 have On the E1135C PDU, locking the Mains
your electrician verify the voltage selection straps and Disconnect switch in the ’O’ position disconnects
jumpers and connect the mains power to the PDU as "mains" power from the loads. However, "mains"
shown on the indicated power installation diagram. power remains at the input terminals of the Mains
Disconnect switch.
Disconnect "mains" power from the PDU before
working on the input side of the Mains Disconnect
switch and follow the lock-out, tag-out procedure.
Working with "mains" power must be performed
only by trained and qualified service personnel.
Holes are provided in the front, side and rear
covers for wire egress. For safety, strain relief
cable clamps (0400-0377) must be used on all
wires routed through these holes. All unused
holes must be blocked by filler plugs (6960-0177).

1 A “lock-out, tag-out procedure is used by electricians. The electrician turns the “mains” power switch off and places a hasp through the
“mains” power switch. The hasp has holes for pad-locks. A tag is placed on the lock which provides information regarding who put the
lock in place, the work being performed, when the lock was installed, when the lock will be removed, and the electrician’s supervisor.
Only the electrician who installed the lock or the electrician’s supervisor (under certain circumstances) may remove the lock and turn the
“mains” power switch on.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-90


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

WARNING NOTE

✺Towhichprevent the possibility of electrical shock,


could cause injury or death, always connect
If the 3070 / 79000 system is moved to a different
site, then the input and output wiring may need to
a "mains" power ground wire to the "G" chassis be reconfigured. Refer to the PDU Upgrade
ground terminal in the PDU. Manual, E4030-90000.

CAUTION

✸Do not turn on power at the external breaker. The


Agilent representative will verify the power
connection and the power itself before starting up
the system.

Table 10-10 Series 3 and 79000 cross-reference tables (3-phase)

E1135C
Power Wire and Breaker Size Table
Description Option Voltage Number Wiring Diagram
3-Phase Wye w/ Neutral AWW 120 / 208 Table 10-12 on page 10-95 Figure 10-64 on page 10-104
L1 05E 127 / 220 Table 10-12 on page 10-95 Figure 10-64 on page 10-104
0E5 220 / 380 Table 10-13 on page 10-96 Figure 10-63 on page 10-102
05L 230 / 400 Table 10-13 on page 10-96 Figure 10-63 on page 10-102
N
L2 L3
G 0E7 240 / 415 Table 10-13 on page 10-96 Figure 10-63 on page 10-102

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-91


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Table 10-10 Series 3 and 79000 cross-reference tables (3-phase) (continued)

E1135C
Power Wire and Breaker Size Table
Description Option Voltage Number Wiring Diagram
3-phase Delta 0ED 200 Table 10-14 on page 10-97 Figure 10-65 on page 10-105

L3 L2 05C 220 Table 10-14 on page 10-97 Figure 10-65 on page 10-105
05H 230 Table 10-14 on page 10-97 Figure 10-65 on page 10-105
0E6 240 Table 10-14 on page 10-97 Figure 10-65 on page 10-105

L1
G

Table 10-11 Series 3 and 79000 cross-reference tables (single-phase)

E1135C Wire and Breaker Size Table


Description Power Option Voltage Number Wiring Diagram
Single-Phase Wye w/ AWV 120 / 208 Table 10-16 on page 10-99 Figure 10-64 on page 10-104
Neutral
AWZ 127 / 220 Table 10-16 on page 10-99 Figure 10-64 on page 10-104
L1 L2 05B 220 / 380 Table 10-15 on page 10-98 Figure 10-63 on page 10-102
05G 230 / 400 Table 10-15 on page 10-98 Figure 10-63 on page 10-102
05K 240 / 415 Table 10-15 on page 10-98 Figure 10-63 on page 10-102

N
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-92


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Table 10-11 Series 3 and 79000 cross-reference tables (single-phase) (continued)

E1135C Wire and Breaker Size Table


Description Power Option Voltage Number Wiring Diagram
Single-Phase Earthed 05M 220 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-67 on page 10-107
L1 05F 230 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-67 on page 10-107
05J 240 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-67 on page 10-107

N
G
Single-Phase AWX 200 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-68 on page 10-108
Non-Earthed
0EB 220 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-68 on page 10-108
L1 0EJ 230 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-68 on page 10-108
0EC 240 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-68 on page 10-108

L2
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-93


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Table 10-11 Series 3 and 79000 cross-reference tables (single-phase) (continued)

E1135C Wire and Breaker Size Table


Description Power Option Voltage Number Wiring Diagram
Single-Phase Center-Tap AWY 100 / 200 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-66 on page 10-106
Neutral
0E3 110 / 220 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-66 on page 10-106
L1 0EG 115 / 230 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-66 on page 10-106
0EH 120 / 240 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-66 on page 10-106
N
L2
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-94


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Table 10-12 3-Phase Wye with neutral (AWW, 05E)

System Type
xDSL / POTS Bay 327X / 79000 317X 307X
Breaker Size in Amps1
[20] 20 [20] 20 [30] 30 [60] 35
Wire Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)2
[4 (12)]** 4(12) [4 (12)] 4(12)* [10(8)] 6(10)* [25 (4)]*** 10(8)
1. Breaker size based on 125 percent of maximum rms current
2. Wire size based on multiconductor cables

* Three current-carrying conductors


** Four current-carrying conductors
*** Pigtail required (Appendix 10, Connecting a
Pigtail to the E1135C PDU.)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-95


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Table 10-13 3-Phase Wye with neutral (0E5, 05L, 0E7)

System Type
327X / 79000 317X 307X
Breaker Size in Amps1
[20] 20 [30] 30 [30] 30
Wire Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)2
[4 (12)] 4(12)** [4 (12)] 4(12)** [10 (8)] 6(10)**
1. Breaker size based on 125 percent of maximum rms current
2. Wire size based on multiconductor cables

** Four current-carrying conductors

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-96


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Table 10-14 3-phase delta (0ED, 05C, 05H, 0E6)

System Type
327X / 79000 317X 307X
Breaker Size in Amps1
[20] 20 [30] 30 [60] 35
Wire Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)2
[4 (12)] 4(12)** [10(8)] 6(10)* [25 (4)]*** 6(10)
1. Breaker size based on 125 percent of maximum rms current
2. Wire size based on multiconductor cables

* Three current-carrying conductors


** Four current-carrying conductors
*** Pigtail required (Appendix 10, Connecting a
Pigtail to the E1135C PDU.)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-97


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Table 10-15 Single-phase Wye with neutral (05B, 05G, 05K)

System Type
327X / 79000 317X 307X
Breaker Size in Amps1
[30] 20 [30] 20 [50] 30
Wire Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)2
[6 (10)] 4(12)* [6 (10)] 4(12)* [16 (6)]*** 6(10)
1. Breaker size based on 125 percent of maximum rms current
2. Wire size based on multiconductor cables

* Three current-carrying conductors


*** Pigtail required (Chapter 10, Connecting a Pigtail
to the E1135C PDU.)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-98


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Table 10-16 Single-Phase Wye with neutral (AWV, AWZ)

System Type
xDSL / POTS Bay 327X / 79000 317X 307X 307X Support Bay
Breaker Size in Amps1
[20] 20 [35] 30 [60] 30 [60] 35 [30] 20
Wire Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)2
[4 (12)] 4(12)* [6 (10)] 6(10)* [16(6)] 6(10)*** [16 (6)]*** 10(8)* [6 (10)] 4(12)*
1. Breaker size based on 125 percent of maximum rms current
2. Wire size based on multiconductor cables

* Three current-carrying conductors


*** Pigtail required (Appendix 10, Connecting a
Pigtail to the E1135C PDU.)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-99


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

Table 10-17 Single-phase non-earthed (AWX, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC) - Single-phase with center tap neutral (AWY, 0E3,0EG, 0EH) -
Single-phase earthed (05M, 05F, 05J)

System Type
xDSL / POTS Bay 327X / 79000 317X 307X 307X Support Bay
Breaker Size in Amps1
[20] 20 [35] 30 [60] 30 [60] 35 [30] 20
Wire Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)2
[4 (12)] 4(12)* [6 (10)] 6(10)* [16(6)]*** 6(10)* [16 (6)]*** 10(8)* [6 (10)] 4(12)*
1. Breaker size based on 125 percent of maximum rms current
2. Wire size based on multiconductor cables

* Three current-carrying conductors


*** Pigtail required (Chapter 10, Connecting a Pigtail
to the E1135C PDU.)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-100


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

“Mains” Wiring Diagrams


The following diagrams show how the mains are wired.
See the E1135C Power Distribution Unit Operating and
Service Manual E1135-90001 for more information.

NOTE
Set the Voltage Selector switch (S1) on the
Control Board to ’230V’ for all voltage options.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-101


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

220/380–240/415 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral


(0E5, 05L, 0E7)

220/380–240/415 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral


(05B, 05G, 05K)

Figure 10-63 220/380-240/415 3-phase Wye with neutral (0E5, 05L, 0E7), 220/380-240/415 Single-phase Wye with neutral
(05B, 05G, 05K)

L1 L1 L2 L3 N

N 0

L2 L3
G
G
T1 T2 T3 N 10A 10A
Connect Input
Line here
G

L1 L2
Note: L3 is available only on 3-phase power

N
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-102


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

120/208–127/220 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral


(AWW, 05E)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-103


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

120/208–127/220 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral


(AWV, AWZ)

Figure 10-64 120/208–127/220 V 3-Phase Wye with neutral (AWW, 05E), 120/208–127/220 V Single-phase Wye with neutral
(AWV, AWZ)

L1 L1 L2 L3 N

0
N*
L2 L3
G G
T1 T2 T3 N 10A 10A
Connect Input
Line here
G

L1 L2 Note: Install jumper between T2 and T3 for Single-Phase


option for E1135C.

* Neutral is required only for POTS and xDSL Bay

N*
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-104


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

200-240 3-phase Delta (0ED, 05C, 05H, 0E6)

Figure 10-65 200-240 3-phase delta (0ED, 05C, 05H, 0E6)

L1 L2 L3 N

1
L3 L2
0

L1
G G
T1 T2 T3 N 10A 10A
Connect Input
Line here
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-105


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

100/200-120/240 V Single-Phase Center-Tap


Neutral (AWY, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH)

Figure 10-66 100/200-120/240 V Single-phase center-tap neutral (AWY, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH)

L1 L2 L3 N

1
L1
0
N
L2
G G
T1 T2 T3 N 10A 10A
Connect Input
Line here
Jumper L2-L3 G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-106


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

220–240 V Single-Phase Earthed (05M, 05F, 05J)

Figure 10-67 220–240 V Single-phase earthed (05M, 05F, 05J)


Set

L1
L1 L2 L3 N

N 0
G

G
T1 T2 T3 N 10A 10A
Connect Input
Line here
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-107


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)

200–240 V Single-Phase Non-Earthed (AWX, 0EB,


0EJ, 0EC)

Figure 10-68 200–240 V Single-phase non-earthed (AWX, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC)

L1 L2 L3 N

L1
1

L2
G
G
T1 T2 T3 N 10A 10A
Connect Input
Line here
G

Jumper L2-L3

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-108


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

NOTE
Tester Power This section contains: The external mains breaker should be located
close to the 3070 family system. Some high
Requirements ■ Identifying the PDU/PDK Type, 10-109
voltages are present in the test system even with
(Series I/II) ■ Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU, 10-112 the tester breaker off. Having the external breaker
■ 44964A/B PDU Electrical Requirements, 10-113
close to the system will allow service personnel to
turn off all power quickly.
■ E1099A PDU Electrical Requirements, 10-114

■ E1170-80003 PDK Electrical Requirements, 10-124

■ E1131A PDU Electrical Requirements, 10-125 NOTE


■ Agilent 3070 Series II / 3 - E1135A/B Power You cannot accurately measure the input current
Distribution Units, 10-128 of the system’s power supplies using conventional
50/60-hertz current probes because the input
current waveforms are rich in harmonics. Any
CAUTION
current-measuring instrument should have a
✸For Agilent 3070 Series I, II systems, improper ac
mains wiring is the most common site preparation
bandwidth exceeding 10 kilohertz. Using
improper instruments can yield results that are 50
problem. To avoid problems, you must verify the percent less than actual. Also, current demand
source and make sure that the system drop depends on the tests that are running on the
conductor is sized correctly. system.

Identifying the PDU/PDK Type


NOTE
The references in this chapter to two-phase power This section describes planning and wiring mains power
assume that you will be using a one-phase, to the system. Plan to have an electrician run the power
center-tapped main to obtain the two phases. drop for the mains power before the Agilent
representative comes to install the system. Use Table
10-18 on page 10-110 to determine the type or types of
PDU or PDK that your system will have. Electrical
requirements and power options for each of these are
described in the following sections.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-109


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-18 Identifying PDU / PDK type

307X Series I System:


Shipped before 1/1/92: 44964A/B PDU See Figure 10-69 on page 10-144
Shipped 1/1/92 to 12/1/93: E1099A PDU See Figure 10-70 on page 10-145
Shipped after 12/1/93: E1131A PDU( See Figure 10-75 on page 10-155
317X Series I System:
All ship dates: E1170-80003 PDK See Figure 10-72 on page 10-149
3X7X Series II System:
Shipped before 7/7/95: E1131A PDU See Figure 10-75 on page 10-155
Shipped 7/7/95 - 11/21/96: E1135A PDU See Figure 10-76 on page 10-159 -
Figure 10-80 on page 10-163
Shipped 11/21/96 - 9/4/98: E1135B PDU See Figure 10-76 on page 10-159 -
Figure 10-80 on page 10-163
3X7X Series 3 System:
Shipped before 9/4/98: E1135B PDU See Figure 10-76 on page 10-159 -
Figure 10-80 on page 10-163
Shipped after 9/4/98: E1135C PDU See Chapter 6, Site Preparation –
Power Requirements
POTS Bay:
Shipped before 7/7/95: has an additional E1131A PDU See Figure 10-75 on page 10-155

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-110


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-18 Identifying PDU / PDK type (continued)

Shipped 7/7/95 - 9/17/98: has an additional E1135A/B PDU See Figure 10-76 on page 10-159 -
Figure 10-80 on page 10-163
E1085A POTS Bay or E2195A xDSL Bay See Chapter 6, Site Preparation –
Power Requirements or the E2195A
xDSL and E1085A POTS Installation and
Upgrade Manual, E1085-90000

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-111


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU


The E1135C PDU is the replacement for the E1131A,
and E1135A/B PDUs. The input terminals on the
E1135C on the mains disconnect switch easily fit
conductor size 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG). It is
strongly suggested that if the recommended conductor
size1 in the following tables is greater than 10 square
millimeters (#8 AWG), that a 450 mm (18-inches) to
609 mm (24-inches) pig tail be created using 10 square
millimeters (#8 AWG) conductor, and the recommended
larger cable be connected to the pigtail. See
Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU on
page 11-84.

1 It is difficult to fit conductor size 16 square millimeters (AWG 6) into the mains disconnect switch, and 25 square millimeters (AWG 4)
will not fit. With an 450 mm (18-inches) to 690 mm (24-inches length pigtail, 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG) will safely carry the 3070
load)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-112


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

44964A/B PDU Electrical Requirements1


CAUTION
Table 10-19 on page 10-113 shows the electrical
requirements and line configuration options for the
44964A/B PDU. Maximum current describes option
✸The two- and three-phase options are unbalanced.
Therefore, the neutral conductor should be the
same size as the line conductors. (Refer to Figure
OE3 (200V) current requirements for a system with all 10-69 on page 10-144.)
optional equipment; other power options and
configurations will require less current. In option 0EF
(208 Volts) only two of the three phases are used in an
unbalanced configuration.

Table 10-19 44964A/B PDU power options

Frequency: 47 to 63 Hz
Voltage:
Option 0E3 200 V (182–222 V rms) 1 phase neutral center tap
Option 0EF 208 V (189–230 V rms) 3 phase wye with neutral
Option 0EB 220-230 V (200–244 V rms) 1 phase no neutral
Option 0EG 110/220-115/230 V (200–244 V rms 1 phase neutral center tap
Option 0EC 240 V (218–266 V rms)1 phase neutral center tap 1 phase no neutral
Option 0EH 120/240 V (218–266 V rms) 1 phase neutral center tap
Maximum Total Current:
1 module 24 A
2 modules 36 A
3 modules 42 A
4 modules 50 A
1 See the 44964B Power Distribution Unit Installation and Service Manual, 03066-90032) for more information.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-113


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

E1099A PDU Electrical Requirements accurately calculating the power requirements for
various system configurations with each power option.
Table 10-20 on page 10-114 shows the electrical
requirements and line configuration options for the
CAUTION
E1099A PDU. Maximum current describes option OE3
(200V) current requirements for a system with all
optional equipment; other power options and
✸The two- and three-phase options are unbalanced.
Therefore, the neutral conductor should be the
configurations will require less current. In option 0EF same size as the line conductors. (Refer to Figure
(208 Volts), all three phases are used in an unbalanced 10-70 on page 10-145.)
configuration. Table 10-21 on page 10-117 through
Table 10-27 on page 10-123 provide a means of more

Table 10-20 E1099A PDU power options

Frequency: 47 to 63 Hz
Voltage:
Option 0E3 200 V (182–222 V rms) 1 phase neutral center tap
Option 0EF 208 V (189–230 V rms) 3 phase wye with neutral
Option 0EB 220-230 V (200–244 V rms) 1 phase no neutral
Option 0EG 110/220-115/230 V (200–244 V rms) 1 phase neutral center tap
Option 0EC 240 V (218–266 V rms)1 phase neutral center tap 1 phase no neutral
Option 0EH 120/240 V (218–266 V rms) 1 phase neutral center tap
Maximum Total Current:
1 module 41 A
2 modules 60 A
3 modules 77 A
4 modules 96 A

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-114


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-21 on page 10-117 is an example that


illustrates how to use Table 10-22 through Table 10-27.
Each power option table specifies the current required
for system devices in the left column; these currents
have been calculated at 9 percent below nominal voltage
(worst case). List the current for devices that will be
part of the installed system in the column to the right.
(The currents for single-phase and three-phase systems
should be balanced as closely as possible by plugging
the devices into the appropriate outlets as designated in
the tables. Your system will be shipped from the factory
configured for the best current balance that can be
obtained.) Total the device currents listed in each
column to obtain the current required for each phase of
mains power.
Table 10-21 illustrates the current requirements of a
typical two-module system operating on two-phase
power. Note how the devices are allocated to different
outlets to try to balance the currents of the center-tapped
phase; as in this example, these currents sometimes
can’t be balanced exactly. The total current required is

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-115


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

36.2 amps (27.2 amps for Phase A to B, plus 9 amps for


the larger of phase B to N or phase A to N currents.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-116


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-21 E1099A option 0EG mains requirements example

Device Current (Amps) 115/230 Volts Single-Phase w/Center Tap


Left & Right Outlets
J50-J53, J64-J71
Module 1 10.5 10.5
Module 2 10.5 10.5
Module 3 10.5
Module 4 10.5
+5 V STC P.S. #1 3.1 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #2 3.1 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #3 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #4 3.1
Front Panel Outlets
J40,J41 - J44-J46 J42,J43 - J47-J49
DUT Power #1 6.0 6.0
DUT Power #2 6.0 6.0
DUT Power #3 6.0
DUT Power #4 6.0
Aux. Equipment 4.0 3.0 1.0
Controller/Peripherals 40.0
* Total current: 27.2 + 9 = 36.2 Phase A - B Phase B - N Phase A - N

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-117


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-22 E1099A option 0EB mains requirements

Device Current (Amps) 220 Volts Single-Phase

Module 1 10.5
Module 2 10.5
Module 3 10.5
Module 4 10.5
+5 V STC P.S. #1 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #2 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #3 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #4 3.1
DUT Power #1 3.0
DUT Power #2 3.0
DUT Power #3 3.0
DUT Power #4 3.0
Aux. Equipment 2.0
Controller/Peripherals 20.0
* Total current:

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-118


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-23 E1099A option 0EC mains requirements

Device Current (Amps) 240 Volts Single-Phase

Module 1 9.6
Module 2 9.6
Module 3 9.6
Module 4 9.6
+5 V STC P.S. #1 2.9
+5 V STC P.S. #2 2.9
+5 V STC P.S. #3 2.9
+5 V STC P.S. #4 2.9
DUT Power #1 3.0
DUT Power #2 3.0
DUT Power #3 3.0
DUT Power #4 3.0
Aux. Equipment 2.0
Controller/Peripherals 20.0
* Total current:

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-119


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-24 E1099A option 0E3 mains requirements

Device Current (Amps) 100/200 Volts Single-Phase w/Center Tap


Left & Right Outlets
J50-J53, J64-J71
Module 1 11.4 10.5
Module 2 11.4 10.5
Module 3 11.4
Module 4 11.4
+5 V STC P.S. #1 3.4 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #2 3.4 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #3 3.4
+5 V STC P.S. #4 3.4
Front Panel Outlets
J40,J41 - J44-J46 J42,J43 - J47-J49
DUT Power #1 6.0 6.0
DUT Power #2 6.0 6.0
DUT Power #3 6.0
DUT Power #4 6.0
Aux. Equipment 4.0 3.0 1.0
Controller/Peripherals 40.0
* Total current: Phase A - B Phase B - N Phase A - N

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-120


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-25 E1099A option 0EG mains requirements

Device Current (Amps) 115/230 Volts Single-Phase w/Center Tap


Left & Right Outlets
J50-J53, J64-J71
Module 1 10.5
Module 2 10.5
Module 3 10.5
Module 4 10.5
+5 V STC P.S. #1 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #2 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #3 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #4 3.1
Front Panel Outlets
J40,J41 - J44-J46 J42,J43 - J47-J49
DUT Power #1 6.0 6.0
DUT Power #2 6.0 6.0
DUT Power #3 6.0
DUT Power #4 6.0
Aux. Equipment 4.0 3.0 1.0
Controller/Peripherals 40.0
* Total current: Phase A - B Phase B - N Phase A - N

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-121


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-26 E1099A option 0EH mains requirements

Device Current (Amps) 120/240 Volts Single-Phase w/Center Tap


Left & Right Outlets
J50-J53, J64-J71
Module 1 9.6
Module 2 9.6
Module 3 9.6
Module 4 9.6
+5 V STC P.S. #1 2.9
+5 V STC P.S. #2 2.9
+5 V STC P.S. #3 2.9
+5 V STC P.S. #4 2.9
Front Panel Outlets
J40,J41 - J44-J46 J42,J43 - J47-J49
DUT Power #1 6.0 6.0
DUT Power #2 6.0 6.0
DUT Power #3 6.0
DUT Power #4 6.0
Aux. Equipment 4.0 3.0 1.0
Controller/Peripherals 40.0
* Total current: Phase A - B Phase B - N Phase A - N

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-122


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-27 E1099A option 0EF mains requirements

Device Current (Amps) 115/230 Volts Single-Phase w/Center Tap


Right Left
Outlets OutletsJJ5
J50-J51 2-J53,
J64-J67 J68-J71
Module 1 11.0
Module 2 11.0
Module 3 11.0
Module 4 11.0
+5 V STC P.S. #1 3.3
+5 V STC P.S. #2 3.3
+5 V STC P.S. #3 3.3
+5 V STC P.S. #4 3.3
Front Panel Outlets
J40,J41 - J44-J46 J42,J43 - J47-J49
DUT Power #1 6.0
DUT Power #2 6.0
DUT Power #3 6.0
DUT Power #4 6.0
Aux. Equipment 4.0
Controller/Peripherals 40.0
* Total current: Ph B-C Ph C-A Ph B - N Ph A - N

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-123


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

E1170-80003 PDK Electrical Requirements1


NOTE
Table 10-28 shows the electrical requirements for The wire sizes recommended in this chapter are
Agilent 317X Series I systems.2 This table is valid for for the SO cord from the receptacle to the system.
all power options. The power requirements are based on The electrician has the responsibility to size the
the maximum number of modules and DUT power service to the receptacle so that the voltage drop
supplies. from the source to the 3070 system does not
exceed 5-percent of the nominal voltage.
Verifying the AC Input
Before installing the "mains" drop for an E1170-80003
PDK, the ac source must be verified to assure that it is CAUTION
adequate to power the test system.

Sizing the Input Conductors and Breakers


✸All power configurations using a neutral are
unbalanced, so there will be neutral current.
Therefore, make the neutral conductor the same
To ensure adequate rms voltage for proper system power size as the line conductors.
supply operation, a system drop connected to an ac
source with the minimum voltage must be sized to
handle rms current loads with less than a 5-percent drop
between the ac source and the system. Using an
inadequate conductor size can cause a voltage drop
across the system drop. This could mean that the rms
voltage into the PDK is not sufficient for proper
operation. If the ac source provides more than the
minimum voltage, then the maximum voltage loss
between the source and the system is not as critical.

1 See the E1099A Power Distribution Unit Installation and Service Manual, E1099-90000, for more information.
2 The E1170-80003 PDK was only used with 3170X systems, not 307X systems.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-124


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-28 E1170-80003 power requirements for all power Verifying the AC Input
options
Before installing the "mains" drop for an E1131A PDU,
System Type the ac source must be verified to assure that it is
adequate to power the test system.
317X
Sizing the Input Conductors and Breakers
Full Load Amps (FLA)
To ensure adequate peak voltage for proper system
29
power supply operation, a system drop connected to an
Breaker Size in Amps ac source with the minimum voltage must be sized to
handle peak current loads with less than a 5-percent
30 drop between the ac source and the system. Using the
SO Cord Wire Size mm2 (AWG) wrong conductor size can cause a larger voltage drop
across the system drop. This could mean that the peak
6 (10) voltage into the PDU is not sufficient for proper
operation. If the ac source provides more than the
minimum voltage, then the maximum voltage loss
E1131A PDU Electrical Requirements between the source and the system is not as critical.
Table 10-29 on page 10-126 and Table 10-30 on
page 10-127 show the electrical requirements for 3070 CAUTION
Series I and II systems respectively, using the E1131A
PDU. The tables are valid for all power options. The
power requirements are based on the maximum number
✸All power configurations using a neutral are
unbalanced, so there will be neutral current.
Therefore, make the neutral conductor the same
of modules and DUT power supplies available. size as the line conductors.

CAUTION

✸The voltage drop to the load must not exceed


5-percent of nominal for Single-phase and
3-phase power. With 3-phase options only two
phases are loaded and the third is a without a load.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-125


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

NOTE
The wire sizes recommended in this chapter are
for the SO cord1 from the receptacle to the
system. The electrician has the responsibility to
size the service to the receptacle so that the
voltage drop from the source to the 3070 system
does not exceed 5-percent of the nominal voltage.

Table 10-29 3070 Series I, E1131A power requirements for all power options

317X 307X POTS Bay


Testhead (PDU #1) Support Bay (PDU #2)
Full Load Amps (FLA)
36 31 16 16
Breaker Size in Amps
40 40 20 20
SO Cord Wire Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
10 (8) 10 (8) 4 (12) 4 (12)

1 SO - Service with Oil-resistant jacket

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-126


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-30 307X Series II, E1131A power requirements for all power options

317X 327X 307X POTS Bay


Uses E1135 Testhead (PDU #1) Support Bay (PDU #2)
Full Load Amps (FLA)
36 NA 31 16 16
Breaker Size in Amps
40 NA 40 20 20
SO Cord Wire Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
6 (10) NA 10 (8) 4 (12) 4 (12)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-127


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Agilent 3070 Series II / 3 - E1135A/B Power requirements of the system (see Table 10-31 on
Distribution Units page 10-130and Table 10-32 on page 10-131).

The E1135A and E1135B were used in all Series II 3070 ■ Copper conductors should be used for the system
systems, and in Series 3 3070 and 79000 systems drop.
shipped through September 1998. ■ The service should have a breaker box installed
If you are working on a system with an E1135C PDU, near the system so that power can be quickly
see Chapter 6, Site Preparation – Power removed in case of an emergency.
Requirements. ■ A 25.4-millimeter (1-inch) hole is provided on the
This section provides minimum power requirements for PDU for the electrician to install a cable clamp
3070 family systems. For most installations, these and power cord. Agilent recommends the use of a
requirements are sufficient. We suggest you review the power cord with a locking plug (one that cannot
next section, Verifying the AC Input on page 10-129, be easily pulled from its outlet) or a hard-wired
for additional information. connection. If the hole is too small to
accommodate the conductors, use a chassis punch
The 3070 family systems require ac electrical power to enlarge the hole.
supplied two ways:
■ The system input power connections on the PDU
1 AC mains power must be supplied to the system’s are made to an input connector block and the
Power Distribution Unit (PDU). For all systems and ground connection is to a terminal bolted to the
power options except one, a customer-supplied chassis. These connectors can accept wire up to
power cord must be wired to the system’s PDU by an 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG). For ease of
electrician. installation, in areas where it meets local code
2 For a 327X system using conductor and breaker requirements, Agilent recommends that you use
option #0EF (3-phase Wye with neutral — 208V; see multi-strand conductor from a box to the PDU.
Table 10-32 on page 10-131) a power cord is 3 Convenience outlets must be located near the system
supplied already wired to the PDU; this is the only for test development centers, test development
system supplied with the power cord. stations, optional extra equipment bays, and the
Agilent makes the following recommendations: 44990A EFS Board Handler. Locate the outlets
within one meter (three feet) of and directly behind
■ A dedicated ac mains service should be provided the device. See Chapter 3, Site Preparation –
for the test system due to the high current Planning to plan the location of convenience outlets.
All convenience outlets must supply 20 amps at

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-128


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

100–127 volts or 10 amps at 200–240 volts, bandwidth exceeding 10 kilohertz. Using


whichever is applicable. improper instruments can yield results that are 50
percent less than actual. Also, current demand
The power requirements for 3070 Series II family
depends on the tests that are running on the
systems with E1135A/B PDUs are shown in Table
system.
10-31 on page 10-130 and Table 10-32 on page 10-131.
The maximum current assumes fully loaded systems
with Serial Test Card Power Supplies. Note that the
operating frequency range for the 3070 family systems CAUTION
is 47–63 hertz when the nominal line frequency is 50 or
60 hertz. ✸Ten thermally-activated circuit breakers designed
to protect the output terminal block are located on
the front of the E1135B PDU. Under normal
Verifying the AC Input operation, if a fault occurs, the rocker on the
Before installing the "mains" drop for an E1135A/B breaker will pop to the open position. The rocker
PDU, the ac source must be verified to assure that it is can be reset by pushing it gently back in place. It
adequate to power the test system. is necessary to wait a few minutes for the breaker
to cool before this can be done.
CAUTION These breakers are not switches and must not be

✸Improper ac mains wiring is the most common


site preparation problem. To avoid problems, you
opened by force. If opened by force, permanent
damage will result. Damage caused by
must verify the source and verify that the system intentionally opening the breaker is not covered
drop conductor is sized correctly. by warranty.

NOTE
You cannot accurately measure the input current
of the system’s power supplies using conventional
50/60-hertz current probes because the input
current waveforms are rich in harmonics. Any
current-measuring instrument should have a

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-129


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-31 3070 Series II family power requirements with E1135A/B PDU

System
Power
Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2
327X 317X 307X3 xDSL/POTS
Bay4
Testhead Support Bay Opts/Current
3-Phase Wye w/ Neutral 0EF (AWW) 120 / 208 15 23 42 15
L1 05E 127 / 220 15 23 42 15
0E5 220 / 380 13 14 22 NA
05L 230 / 400 13 14 22 NA
N
0E7 240 / 415 13 14 22 NA
L2 L3
G
2-Phase Open Delta 05A 100 / 200 18 21 43 NA
w/CT Neutral

1. Calculated with a fully-loaded 3X7X system with 3 STC cards in every module.
2. DUT Power supplies are configured for 120 volts ac for Opt. 0EF, 05E and 05A. 0E5. 05L, 0E7 set to 240 volts ac.
3. 2- and 3- phase 307X systems only require one PDU. Single Phase systems require one PDU for the testhead and one for the support bay.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-130


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

4. POTS and xDSL bays always require a separate power drop. Use the POTS/xDSL power options that is in the column below on the same line as the
system power option.

Table 10-32 3070 Series II family power requirements with E1135A/B PDU

System
Power Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2
327X 317X 307X3 xDSL/POTS
Bay4
Testhead Support Bay Opts/Current
Single-Phase Wye w/ 05B 220 / 380 18 21 37 NA
Neutral
05G 230 / 400 18 21 37 NA
L1 L2 05K 240 / 415 18 21 37 NA

N
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-131


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-32 3070 Series II family power requirements with E1135A/B PDU (continued)

System
Power Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2
Single-Phase Earthed 05M 220 22 36 42 24 15
L1 05F 230 22 36 42 24 15
05J 240 22 36 42 24 15

N
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-132


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-32 3070 Series II family power requirements with E1135A/B PDU (continued)

System
Power Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2
327X 317X 307X3 xDSL/POTS
Bay
Testhead Support Bay Opts/Current4
Single-Phase AWX 200 NA 36 42 20 15
Non-Earthed
0EB 220 NA 36 42 20 15
L1 0EJ 230 NA 36 42 20 15
0EC 240 NA 36 42 20 15

L2
G

Single-Phase Center-Tap AWY 100 / 200 25 43 42 24 15


Neutral
0E3 110 / 220 25 43 42 24 15
L1 0EG 115 / 230 25 43 42 24 15
0EH 120 / 240 25 43 42 24 15
N
L2
G
1. Calculated with a fully-loaded 3X7X system with 3 STC cards in every module.
2. DUT Power supplies are configured for 200-240 volts ac.
3. 2- and 3- phase 307X systems only require one PDU. Single Phase systems require one PDU for the testhead and one for the support bay.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-133


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

4. POTS and xDSL bays always require a separate power drop. Use the POTS/xDSL power options that is in the column below on the same line as the
system power option.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-134


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Sizing the Input Conductors and Circuit Breakers


NOTE
To ensure adequate peak voltage for proper operation of
The wire sizes recommended in this chapter are
the system power supply, two minimum requirements
for the SO cord from the receptacle to the system.
must be met:
The electrician has the responsibility to size the
■ A system drop must be connected to an ac source wire to the receptacle so that the voltage drop
with at least the minimum voltage. from the transformer to the 3070 system does not
exceed 5-percent of the nominal voltage.
■ The conductor used for the drop must be sized to
handle peak current loads with less than a
5-percent drop between the ac source and the
system.
Use Table 10-33 on page 10-136 and Table 10-34 on
page 10-137 to direct you to another table listing the
correct conductor sizes. Using a conductor that is too
small can cause a larger voltage drop across the system
drop. This could mean that the peak voltage into the
PDU is not sufficient for proper operation. If the ac
source provides more than the minimum voltage, then
the maximum voltage loss between the source and the
system is not as critical.

CAUTION

✸All power configurations using a neutral are


unbalanced, so there will be neutral current.
Therefore, make the neutral conductor the same
size as the line conductors.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-135


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-33 Conductor and breaker size cross reference table

System Power
Option Voltage Wire and Breaker Size Table Number
3-Phase Wye w/ Neutral 0EF (AWW) 120 / 208 Table 10-35 on page 10-139
L1 05E 127 / 220 Table 10-35 on page 10-139
0E5 220 / 380 Table 10-36 on page 10-139

N 05L 230 / 400 Table 10-36 on page 10-139


0E7 240 / 415 Table 10-36 on page 10-139
L2 L3
G

2-Phase Open Delta 05A 100/200 Table 10-37 on page 10-140


w/CT Neutral

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-136


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-34 Conductor and breaker size cross reference table (single-phase options)

System Power
Option Voltage Wire and Breaker Size Table Number
Single-Phase Wye w/ 05B 220 / 380 Table 10-38 on page 10-140
Neutral
05G 230 / 400 Table 10-38 on page 10-140
L1 L2 05K 240 / 415 Table 10-38 on page 10-140

N
G
Single-Phase Earthed 05M 220 Table 10-40 on page 10-141

L1 05F 230 Table 10-40 on page 10-141


05J 240 Table 10-40 on page 10-141

N
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-137


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-34 Conductor and breaker size cross reference table (single-phase options) (continued)

System Power
Option Voltage Wire and Breaker Size Table Number
Single-Phase AWX 200 Table 10-41 on page 10-142
Non-Earthed
0EB 220 Table 10-41 on page 10-142
L1 0EJ 230 Table 10-41 on page 10-142
0EC 240 Table 10-41 on page 10-142

L2
G
Single-Phase Center-Tap AWY 100 / 200 Table 10-39 on page 10-141
Neutral
0E3 110 / 220 Table 10-39 on page 10-141
L1 0EG 115 / 230 Table 10-39 on page 10-141
0EH 120 / 240 Table 10-39 on page 10-141
N
L2
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-138


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-35 3-phase wye with neutral (0EF, 05E)

System Type
POTS Bay 327X 317X 307X
Breaker Size in Amps
20 20 30 50
SO Cord Conductor Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
4 (12) 6 (10) 6 (10) 10 (8)

Table 10-36 3-phase wye with neutral (0E5, 05L, 0E7)

System Type
327X 317X 307X
Breaker Size in Amps
20 20 30
SO Cord Conductor Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
4 (12) 4 (12) 6 (10)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-139


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-37 2-phase open delta with center tap of one phase (05A)

System Type
327X 317X 307X
Breaker Size in Amps
20 30 50
SO Cord Conductor Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
4 (12) 6 (10) 10 (8)

Table 10-38 Single-phase wye w/neutral (05B, 05G, 05K)

System Type
327X 317X 307X
Breaker Size in Amps
30 40 70
SO Cord Conductor Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
4 (12) 6 (10) 6 (10)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-140


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-39 Single- phase with center tap neutral (AWY, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH)

System Type
POTS Bay 327X 317X 307X
Testhead Support Bay
Breaker Size in Amps
20 30 50 50 30
SO Cord Conductor Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
4 (12) 6 (10) 10 (8) 10 (8) 6 (10)

Table 10-40 Single-phase earthed (05M, 05F, 05J)

System Type
POTS Bay 327X 317X 307X
Testhead Support Bay
Breaker Size in Amps
20 25 50 50 30
SO Cord Conductor Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
4 (12) 6 (10) 10 (8) 10 (8) 6 (10)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-141


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)

Table 10-41 Single-phase non-earthed (AWX, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC)

System Type
POTS Bay 327X 317X 307X
Testhead Support Bay
Breaker Size in Amps
20 25 50 50 30
SO Cord Conductor Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
4 (12) 6 (10) 10 (8) 10 (8) 6 (10)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-142


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

Connecting Mains This section contains:


Power To The ■ Introduction, 10-143

System ■ 44964A/B AC Mains Connection, 10-144

■ E1099A AC Mains Connection, 10-145

■ Connecting Power to the E1170-80003 PDK, 10-146

■ Connecting Power to the E1131A PDU, 10-150

■ Connecting Power to the E1135A/B PDU, 10-157

Introduction
Have your electrician connect the mains power to the
PDU or PDK as shown on the power installation
diagrams in the next few sections. Use Table 10-18 on
page 10-110, to determine which figure should be used.

CAUTION

✸Do not turn on power at the external breaker. The


Agilent representative will verify the power
connection and the power itself before starting up
the system.

NOTE
The electrician will not be able to measure true
current to the system because power consumption
is dependent on the testplan, and the crest factor of
switching power supplies causes a non-sinusoidal
waveform.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-143


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

44964A/B AC Mains Connection

Figure 10-69 44964A/B AC mains connection1

1 See the 44964B Power Distribution Installation and Service Manual, 03066-90032, for more information.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-144


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

E1099A AC Mains Connection

Figure 10-70 E1099A ac mains connection1

1 See the E1099A Power Distribution Installation and Service Manual, E1099-90000, for more information.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-145


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

Connecting Power to the E1170-80003 PDK


Rotate the testhead, if necessary, to access the top of the
PDK. Using a T20 Torx driver, remove 6 screws to
access the mains terminals as shown in Figure 10-71.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-146


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

Figure 10-71 Accessing the mains terminals in the E1170-80003 PDK

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-147


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

Using a 1/4-inch flat blade screwdriver, connect the


mains conductors to the mains terminals as shown in
Figure 10-72.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-148


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
Figure 10-72 Wiring the mains to the E1170-80003 PDK

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-149


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

Connecting Power to the E1131A PDU


Figure 10-73 shows the location of PDU #1 and PDU
#2 in a 307X support bay.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-150


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

Figure 10-73 Locating E1131A PDU #1 and PDU #2

(Branch)

(Main)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-151


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

Using a T20 Torx driver, remove 5 screws to access the


mains terminals as shown in Figure 10-74.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-152


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

Figure 10-74 Accessing the mains terminals in the E1131A PDU

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-153


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

The Protective Earth Ground connector is provided for


attaching an additional (redundant) ground conductor
for safety in case the mains ground conductor should
fail.
Using a 1/4-inch flat blade screwdriver, connect the
mains conductors to the mains terminals as shown in
Figure 10-75.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-154


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
Figure 10-75 Wiring the mains to the E1131A PDU

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-155


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

E1131A Main/Branch Connection You must remove the PDU from the bay to wire the
Emergency Shutdown wires. The access plate is on the
The Emergency Shutdown main/branch connections
rear of the PDU.
between the two PDUs in a 307X support bay are wired
at the factory, so no wiring is necessary during
installation.
However, if you have multiple 3070 / Series II family
systems, and you want the Emergency Shutdown switch
on one system to also shut down one or more other
systems, some additional wiring is necessary. To
implement parallel remote emergency shutdown, all
systems must have E1131A PDUs; older PDUs do not
have this capability. For wiring instructions, see the
E1131A Power Distribution Unit Installation and
Service Manual (E1131-90000).

WARNING

✺Hazardous voltages and currents may exist


beneath the covers of the PDU, even when all
PDU circuit breakers are in the "standby/off"
position. To remove all power, remove ac mains
to both PDUs.

NOTE
The voltage selector switch (S1) inside the PDU
DOES NOT set the output voltage of the PDU. It
sets the PDU’s remote shutdown circuitry for the
appropriate input voltage range: 100–127 volts or
200–240 volts.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-156


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

Connecting Power to the E1135A/B PDU


The input power connections for each power option for
the E1135A/B are shown in Table 10-42.

Table 10-42 E1135A/B PDU Wiring Diagrams

Power Option Diagram location


220/380–240/415 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (0E5, 05L, 0E7) Figure 10-76 on page 10-159
220/380–240/415 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral (05B, 05G, 05K)
208 or 220 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (0EF, AWW, 05E) Figure 10-77 on page 10-160
200V 2-Phase Open Delta with Phase Center-Tap Neutral (05A)
200–240V Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral (AWY, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH) Figure 10-78 on page 10-161
220–240V Single-Phase Earthed (05M, 05F, 05J) Figure 10-79 on page 10-162
200–240V Single-Phase Non-Earthed (AWX, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC) Figure 10-80 on page 10-163

The Emergency Shutdown main/branch connections


between the two PDUs in a 307X support bay are wired WARNING
at the factory, so no wiring is necessary during
installation. ✺Hazardous voltages and currents may exist
beneath the covers of the PDU, even when all
PDU circuit breakers are in the "standby/off"
However, if you have multiple 3070 / Series II family
position. To remove all power, remove ac mains
systems, and you want the Emergency Shutdown switch
on one system to also shut down one or more other to both PDUs.
systems, some additional wiring is necessary. To
implement parallel remote emergency shutdown, all
systems must have E1131A or E1135A/B/C PDUs;
older PDUs do not have this capability. For wiring
instructions, see the E1135C Power Distribution Unit
Operating and Service Manual, E1135-90001, section
The Branch Control Function.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-157


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

NOTE
The voltage selector switch (S1) inside the PDU
DOES NOT set the output voltage of the PDU. It
sets the PDU’s remote shutdown circuitry for the
appropriate input voltage range: 100–127 volts or
200–240 volts.
See the E1135C Power Distribution Unit Manual,
E1135-90001, for the switch location.

NOTE
For all of the power options set the Voltage
Selector switch (S1) on the Control Board to
‘230V’.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-158


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

220/380–240/415 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (0E5, 05L,


0E7)

220/380–240/415 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral (05B,


05G, 05K)

Figure 10-76 220/380–240/415 V 3-phase wye with neutral (0E5, 05L, 0E7), 220/380–240/415 V single-phase wye with neutral
(05B, 05G, 05K)

L1

N
L2 L3
G

Connect Input
Line here
L1 L2
Note: L3 is available only on 3-phase power

N
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-159


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

208 or 220 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (0EF, AWW, 05E)

200V 2-Phase Open Delta with Phase Center-Tap Neutral


(05A)

Figure 10-77 208 or 220 V 3-phase wye with neutral (0EF, AWW, 05E), 200V 2-phase open delta with phase center-tap neutral
(05A)

L1

N
L2 L3
G

Connect Input
Line here
L3 L2

N
L1
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-160


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

200–240V Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral (AWY, 0E3,


0EG, 0EH)

Figure 10-78 200–240V single-phase center-tap neutral (AWY, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH)

L1
N
L2
G
Connect Input
Line here

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-161


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

220–240V Single-Phase Earthed (05M, 05F, 05J)

Figure 10-79 220–240V single-phase earthed (05M, 05F, 05J)

L1

N
G

Connect Input
Line here

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-162


Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System

200–240V Single-Phase Non-Earthed (AWX, 0EB, 0EJ,


0EC)

Figure 10-80 200–240V single-phase non-earthed (AWX, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC)

L1

L2
G
Connect Input
Line here

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-163


11 Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction
Conversion
03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... ■ Introduction, 11-2

■ Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure,


11-4

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-1


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Introduction

NOTE
Introduction This section contains: This current reduction conversion procedure is
NOT a warranty cost item. MTD does not
■ Introduction, 11-2
recognize it as a problem, but it does offer the
■ Who Should do the Current Reduction Conversion?, opportunity for the customer to reduce their
11-3 current consumption, and the size of their service
■ What to Do in Case of Difficulty, 11-3
mains.

Introduction
NOTE
This chapter provides the information required to
reconfigure the power subsystem of an Agilent 3070 The current reduction conversion uses the existing
Series 3 or 79000 which was shipped prior to June 1999 hardware. It does not have a product number.
to have the same power requirements as 3070 / 79000
systems shipped after June 1999. This does not apply to For the serial numbers shown for each system type in
3070 Series I/II systems. Table 11-1, several changes were made which
significantly reduced the current requirements. Several
power options were also changed. See Facts about
PDUs, MPUs and Power Options on page 6-41 for a
list of important changes concerning PDUs, MPUs and
power options which have occurred with 3070 Series 3 /
79000 products.

Table 11-1 Series 3 / 79000 current requirements reduction serial numbers

System Type 79000 327X 317X 307X


Testhead Product E2190A E9997A E9998A E9900A
Serial Numbers US38050109 and US38240151 and US38240242 and US38240239 and
between US38050101 US38240101 US38240101 US33240101

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-2


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Introduction

The testhead product number and serial number are


located on the rear, lower right side on the
cross-member of the testhead.

Who Should do the Current Reduction


Conversion?
This current reduction conversion should only be
installed by a 3070 / 79000 service-trained customer
engineer (CE). Current reduction reconfiguration
requires familiarity the electro-mechanical assemblies in
the 3070 / 79000 testheads and xDSL/POTS bay.

WARNING

✺The hardware portion of this upgrade procedure


should be performed only by a 3070
service-trained and qualified customer engineer.
Voltages capable of causing bodily injury or death
are present in the system.

What to Do in Case of Difficulty


For most problems, contact Agilent’s Measurement
System Knowledge Center (MSKC). In the U.S. call
1-800-593-6635 with your MSKC support handle.
Outside the U.S. call your local Agilent Service
Representative to access the MSKC.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-3


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Series 3 Current This section contains: Current Reduction Conversion Preview


Reduction Current Reduction Conversion Preview, 11-4 1 Schedule the Conversion
Conversion Schedule the Conversion, 11-5 2 Determine the System Type and Power Option.
Procedure Determine the System Type and Power Option, 11-5 3 Shut Down the System.
Shut Down the System, 11-8 4 Set the DUT Power Supply’s Input Voltage.
Set the DUT Power Supply’s Input Voltage, 11-9 5 Locate the system type and power option diagram
Agilent 6621A and 6624A Line Voltage Settings, 11-9
using Table 11-7 on page 11-21. Rewire the Inputs
to the Outlets as shown for load balancing.
Agilent 6634A Line Voltage Settings, 11-15
6 Reconnect the PDU to the Mains. Note that if the
6634B Line Voltage Settings, 11-17 existing wiring is larger than 10 square millimeters
Agilent 6642A Line Voltage Settings, 11-18
(#8 AWG), a pigtail should be used. See the section
Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU.
Rewire the Inputs to the Outlets, 11-20

327X 1-Module System AC Outlets, 11-29 NOTE


79000 1-Module System AC Outlets, 11-40 If a replacement E1135C is being installed and the
recommended wire size is greater than 10 square
317X 2-Module System AC Outlets, 11-51 millimeters (#8 AWG), which is the largest wire
307X 4-Module 1-PDU System AC Outlets, 11-62 size that will easily fit in the E1135C PDU, see the
section Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C
307X 4-Module 2-PDU System AC Outlets, 11-72 PDU on page 11-84
E1085 POTS Bay and E2195 xDSL Bay AC Outlets, 11-79

Reconnect the Loads, 11-84 7 Reconnect the Loads.


Verify the System, 11-84 8 Verify the System.
Complete the Conversion, 11-84 9 Complete the Conversion.
Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU, 11-84

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-4


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Schedule the Conversion


Schedule with the user approximately 4 hours when the
system can be out of service.
Notify the customer that an electrician will need to be
available for disconnecting the "mains" and re-wiring
the "mains" after the conversion is complete. Schedule
with the electrician when a reduced current power drop
will be installed, and available for use. This may consist
of an SO1 power cord and plug, or in some cases may
require the electrician to hard wire the final connection
to the system.
Verify that the electrician has the materials to connect a
pigtail to the system if the incoming wire size exceeds
10 square millimeters (#8 AWG) and a new power drop
is not being installed.

Determine the System Type and Power Option


See Chapter 6 for full load amps (FLA), wire sizes and
breaker sizes.
Determine the system type and power option of this
system. On the rear of the 3070 system, on the serial
number tag, is the E99XXA common testhead product
number (CTPN). The 79000 does not have a CTPN but
is identified as a 79000. Refer to Figure 11-1 on
page 11-6, to identify the testhead product number
which may be used to locate the correct tables in
Chapter 6, Site Preparation – Power Requirements
and throughout this procedure.

1 SO - Service with Oil-resistant jacket

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-5


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-1 Identifying the merchandising number

Series3+79K.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-6


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

On the rear panel of the E1135C PDU is a panel, shown


in Figure 11-2 on page 11-8, which indicates the
voltage, number of phases, and full load amps (FLA),
also called ARMS, for the PDU as it was originally
specified. After completing this procedure, the FLA
will be decreased to match the new power requirements.
Using this information, and the power option
requirement for your country, determine the power
option the PDU is configured for. If you are moving the
system to a different location, you may want to
reconfigure the system to a different power option.
See Table 10-8 on page 10-84 for the full load amps,
wire sizes, and breaker sizes after this procedure is
completed. Mark out the old value and add the new
value on the ARMS line when the upgrade is complete.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-7


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-2 Identifying the original 3070 power requirements

Number
Volts AC of Phases

ARMS =
Full Load
Amperes

MainsLabel1.wpg

Shut Down the System


Execute testhead power off. Shut down the
controller.1

1 Log in as superuser. Type: shutdown -h 0

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-8


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Power down the system using the PDU on/off switch.


Have the electrician disconnect the PDU from the NOTE
"mains" and use the lock-out, tag out1 procedure to Option #05A is not available on the Corporate
ensure that the power remains off.2 Price List (CPL) after June 1999. The DUT
power supplies input voltage for Japanese systems
Set the DUT Power Supply’s Input Voltage are set to 220 volts at the factory and the neutral
center tap is no longer used.
Each DUT power supply’s input voltage should be set to
220 or 240 volts, as appropriate to the system being If Three-Phase Delta power (0ED) is not
converted. Based on the power option of the system, available, use the Single-Phase power option
determine the DUT supply line voltage using Table (AWY). 307X single-phase option AWY systems
11-2 on page 11-10 or Table 11-3 on page 11-11. Then will require two power drops.
proceed with the instructions for the model of DUT
power supply you are installing on the pages that follow
the table.

NOTE
Beginning with the serial numbers shown Table
11-1 on page 11-2, all DUT power supplies in
3070 / 79000 systems are factory configured to
220 or 240 volts. The outlets where the DUT Agilent 6621A and 6624A Line Voltage Settings
power supplies are connected may also have been The 6621A and 6624A supplies can be set to accept ac
modified as described in the following sections, as input voltage of 100, 120, 220, or 240 volts by
well as the Repair I Manual, E4000-90160, positioning the voltage selector card located inside of
Chapter 1. the line module. Figure 11-3 on page 11-13 shows the
location of the power module.

1 A “lock-out, tag-out procedure is used by electricians. The electrician turns the “mains” power switch off and places a hasp through the
“mains” power switch. The hasp has holes for pad-locks. A tag is placed on the lock which provides information regarding who put the
lock in place, the work being performed, when the lock was installed, when the lock will be removed, and the electrician’s supervisor.
Only the electrician who installed the lock or the electrician’s supervisor (under certain circumstances) may remove the lock and turn the
“mains” power switch on.
2 In some cases this may mean unplugging the system.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-9


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Table 11-2 DUT power supply line voltage setting (three-phase)

System Power Voltage DUT Supply


Option Line Voltage
3-Phase Wye w/ Neutral AWW 120 / 208 220V
L1 05E 127 / 220 220V
0E5 220 / 380 220V

N 05L 230 / 400 240V


0E7 240 / 415 240V
L2 L3
G
Three-Phase Delta 0ED 200 220V

L3 L2 05C 220 220V


05H 230 240V
0E6 240 240V

L1
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-10


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Table 11-3 DUT power supply line voltage setting (single-phase)

System Power Voltage DUT Supply


Option Line Voltage
Single-Phase Wye w/ AWV 120 / 208 220V
Neutral
AWZ 127 / 220 220V
L1 L2 05B 220 / 380 220V
05G 230 / 400 240V
05K 240 / 415 240V

N
G
Single-Phase Earthed 05M 220 220V
L1 05F 230 240V
05J 240 240V

N
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-11


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Table 11-3 DUT power supply line voltage setting (single-phase) (continued)

System Power Voltage DUT Supply


Option Line Voltage
Single-Phase AWX 200 220V
Non-Earthed
0EB 220 220V
L1 0EJ 230 240V
0EC 240 240V

L2
G
Single-Phase Center-Tap AWY 100 / 200 220V
Neutral
0E3 110 / 220 220V
L1 0EG 115 / 230 240V
0EH 120 / 240 240V
N
L2
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-12


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-3 6621A and 6624A line input power module location

Line input power module

rear662x.wpg

The procedure for changing the input line voltage is as 3 Grasp the voltage selector PC board with a pair of
follows. needle-nose pliers and slide it out of its slot.
1 Remove the power card from the ac input socket on 4 To select a voltage, orient the PC board so that the
the back of the power supply. desired voltage appears on the top left side of the
board (see Figure 11-4 on page 11-14). Push the
2 To open the power module, move the plastic door on
board all the way back into its slot.
the module aside. If your line voltage change
requires a change in rating of the fuse, rotate FUSE The desired line voltage must be visible through the
PULL to the left and remove the fuse (see Figure module window when the board is installed.
11-4 on page 11-14).

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-13


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-4 6621A and 6624A voltage select PC board

Line input
power module
es
o ic s
h e
d d

of p bo th c
c b si
on lta ge

r
oa
Vo
F1

Voltage Select PC Board

Operating voltage is shown in module window

6628pow.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-14


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

5 Install the correct fuse in the door of the line module


if your line voltage change also requires a change in
the rating of the fuse (see Table 11-6 on page 11-19).

Table 11-4 6621A and 6624A fuse requirements

Line Voltage Fuse Needed Part Number


100 / 120 V 8 AF/250V 2110-0342
220 / 240 V 4 AF/250V 2110-0055

1 Turn off the supply and use a #2 Pozidriv screwdriver


WARNING to remove the top cover by removing five screws:
✸Make sure the replacement fuse type (size) and
rating (current, speed, and voltage) is consistent
two M5 on each side and one M4 on the rear panel.
2 Locate the line voltage select switches S2 and S3 (see
with the voltage level you are operating at. Using
Figure 11-5 on page 11-16).
a substitute fuse could result in a fire hazard.

6 Close the door of the line module and insert the


power cord in the ac input socket. Your power
supply is now configured to operate at the voltage
you selected.

Agilent 6634A Line Voltage Settings


The 6634A supply can be set to accept 100, 120, 220 or
240 volts ac input. You can convert line voltage by
setting three components: two line select switches (S2
and S3) and the rear panel fuse (F1). To convert the
supply from one line voltage to another, proceed as
follows:

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-15


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-5 6634A line voltage selection


).

T1

S2

U1 S3
C26

U2

GPIB U3
Connector
Terminal
Block

Line Receptacle
Fuse (F1) 6632ps.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-16


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

3 Note that each switch has two positions. 4 Check the rating of the fuse (F1) installed in the rear
Representations of these positions are silkscreened panel fuse holder and replace with the correct fuse if
on the PC board next to the switches. To change the necessary. Use Table 11-5 to determine the proper
line voltage, consult the silkscreen drawing and set fuse.
the switches accordingly.

Table 11-5 6634A fuse requirements

Line Voltage Fuse Needed Part Number


100 / 120 V 4 AF/250V 2110-0055
220 / 240 V 2 AF/250V 2110-0002

3 Slightly spread the bottom rear of the cover and pull


WARNING it back to disengage it from the unit.
✸Make sure the replacement fuse type (size) and
rating (current, speed, and voltage) is consistent
4 Locate the ac input wiring harness on the left side of
the transformer.
with the voltage level you are operating at. Using
a substitute fuse could result in a fire hazard. 5 Use needle nose pliers and connect the ac input
wiring harness according to the information in
Figure 11-6 on page 11-18.
6634B Line Voltage Settings
The 6634B supply is set at the factory for 120 volt line
power. The 6634B supply can be set to accept 100, 120,
220 or 240 volts ac input by setting the jumpers on the
power transformer as shown in Figure 11-6 on
page 11-18.
1 Turn off power to the supply and disconnect the
power cord from the power source.
2 Remove the four screws that secure the two carrying
straps and outer cover.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-17


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-6 6634B line voltage selection

Agilent 6642A Line Voltage Settings 1 Turn off power to the supply and disconnect the
power cord from the power source.
The 6642A supply can be set to accept 100, 120, 220 or
240 volts ac input by setting the line voltage select 2 Remove the four screws that secure the two carrying
switches. straps and outer cover.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-18


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

3 Slightly spread the bottom rear of the cover and pull 4 Slide the dust cover back far enough to expose the
it back to disengage it from the front panel. select switches (see Figure 11-7 on page 11-19).

Figure 11-7 6642A line voltage selection

AC line voltage
switch settings

5 Move the line voltage select switches to the positions 7 Change the line fuse (on the rear panel) to the proper
corresponding to the desired line voltage. value for the new line voltage (see Table 11-6).
6 Replace the top cover and secure the carrying straps.

Table 11-6 6642A Fuse Requirements

Line Voltage Fuse Needed Part Number


100 V 6 AF/250V 2110-0056
120 V 5 AF/250V 2110-0010
220 / 230 / 340 V 3 AF/250V 2110-0003

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-19


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

WARNING NOTE

✸Make sure the replacement fuse type (size) and


rating (current, speed, and voltage) is consistent
Option #05A is not available on the Corporate
Price List (CPL) after June 1999. The DUT
with the voltage level you are operating at. Using power supplies input voltage for Japanese systems
a substitute fuse could result in a fire hazard. are set to 220 volts at the factory and the neutral
center tap is no longer used.

Rewire the Inputs to the Outlets If Three-Phase Delta power (0ED) is not
available, use the Single-Phase power option
To wire the ac outlets in your system, start by finding (AWY). 307X single-phase option AWY systems
the appropriate information as described below. If the will require two power drops.
power option you are looking for is not present in the
table, it means that that option is not supported in that
configuration:
1 Find the section in Table 11-7 on page 11-21 or
Table 11-8 on page 11-24 that describes your system
configuration: the number of modules, location of
outlets, and number of PDUs, as well as the figure
page number which describes your power option
wiring:
2 Do NOT plug in the instruments, fans, etc. to the
outlets at this time. This will be done after the
voltages connected to the outlets are tested. Use the
tables to verify the voltage from outlets or that
devices are plugged into the correct outlets.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-20


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Table 11-7 Power option wiring cross-reference (three-phase)

L-N Voltage/
Power L-L Voltage
Power Configuration Option - Phases Testhead
Outlet Locations 327X 79000 317X 307X Support Bay Telecom
Figure 11-8 on Figure 11-19 Figure 11-30 Figure 11-41 Outlet Bays
page 11-29 on page 11-40 on page 11-51 on page 11-62 Location E1085A
1-PDU: POTS or
Figure 11-41 E2195A
on xDSL
page 11-62 Figure 11-58
2-PDU: on
Figure 11-51 page 11-80
on
page 11-72

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-21


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Table 11-7 Power option wiring cross-reference (three-phase) (continued)

L-N Voltage/
Power L-L Voltage
Power Configuration Option - Phases Testhead
3-Phase Wye w/ Neutral AWW 120 / 208 - 3 Figure 11-9 on Figure 11-20 Figure 11-31 Figure 11-42 with testhead AWV Figure
page 11-30 on page 11-41 on page 11-52 on page 11-63, 11-60 on
L1
Figure 11-44 page 11-82
on page 11-65
05E 127 / 220 - 3 Figure 11-9 on Figure 11-20 Figure 11-31 Figure 11-42 with testhead AWZ Figure
N page 11-30 on page 11-41 on page 11-52 on page 11-63, 11-60 on
Figure 11-44 page 11-82
L2 L3 on page 11-65
G
0E5 220 / 380 - 3 Figure 11-11 Figure 11-22 Figure 11-33 Figure 11-45 with testhead 05M Figure
on page 11-32 on page 11-43 on page 11-54 on page 11-66, 11-61 on
Figure 11-47 page 11-83
on page 11-68
05L 230 / 400 - 3 Figure 11-11 Figure 11-22 Figure 11-33 Figure 11-45 with testhead 05F Figure
on page 11-32 on page 11-43 on page 11-54 on page 11-66, 11-61 on
Figure 11-47 page 11-83
on page 11-68
0E7 240 / 415 - 3 Figure 11-11 Figure 11-22 Figure 11-33 Figure 11-45 with testhead 05J Figure
on page 11-32 on page 11-43 on page 11-54 on page 11-66, 11-61 on
Figure 11-47 page 11-83
on page 11-68

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-22


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Table 11-7 Power option wiring cross-reference (three-phase) (continued)

L-N Voltage/
Power L-L Voltage
Power Configuration Option - Phases Testhead
Three-Phase Delta 0ED 200 - 3 Figure 11-9 on Figure 11-20 Figure 11-31 Figure 11-42 with testhead AWY Figure
page 11-30 on page 11-41 on page 11-52 on page 11-63, 11-61 on
L3 L2 Figure 11-44 page 11-83
on page 11-65
05C 220 - 3 Figure 11-9 on Figure 11-20 Figure 11-31 Figure 11-42 with testhead 0E3 Figure
page 11-30 on page 11-41 on page 11-52 on page 11-63, 11-61 on
Figure 11-44 page 11-83
L1 on page 11-65
G
05H 230 - 3 Figure 11-9 on Figure 11-20 Figure 11-31 Figure 11-42 with testhead 0EG Figure
page 11-30 on page 11-41 on page 11-52 on page 11-63, 11-61 on
Figure 11-44 page 11-83
on page 11-65
0E6 240 - 3 Figure 11-9 on Figure 11-20 Figure 11-31 Figure 11-42 with testhead 0EH Figure
page 11-30 on page 11-41 on page 11-52 on page 11-63, 11-61 on
Figure 11-44 page 11-83
on page 11-65

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-23


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Table 11-8 Power option wiring cross-reference (single-phase)

L-N Voltage/
Power L-L Voltage -
Power Configuration Option Phases Testhead
Outlet Locations 327X 79000 317X 307X Support Bay Telecom
Figure 11-8 Figure 11-19 Figure 11-30 Figure 11-41 Outlet Bays E1085A
on page 11-29 on page 11-40 on page 11-51 on page 11-62 Location POTS or
1-PDU Figure E2195A xDSL
11-41 on Figure 11-58
page 11-62 on page 11-80
2-PDU Figure
11-51 on
page 11-72

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-24


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Table 11-8 Power option wiring cross-reference (single-phase) (continued)

L-N Voltage/
Power L-L Voltage -
Power Configuration Option Phases Testhead
Single-Phase Wye w/ AWV 120 / 208 - 1 Figure 11-13 Figure 11-24 Figure 11-35 Figure 11-52 Figure 11-54 AWV Figure
Neutral on page 11-34 on page 11-45 on page 11-56 on page 11-73 on page 11-75 11-60 on
page 11-82
L1 L2
AWZ 127 / 220 - 1 Figure 11-13 Figure 11-24 Figure 11-35 Figure 11-52 Figure 11-54 AWZ Figure
on page 11-34 on page 11-45 on page 11-56 on page 11-73 on page 11-75 11-60 on
page 11-82
05B 220 / 380 - 1 Figure 11-15 Figure 11-26 Figure 11-37 Figure 11-48 with testhead 05M Figure
N on page 11-36 on page 11-47 on page 11-58 on 11-61 on
G page 11-69, page 11-83
Figure 11-50
on page 11-71
05G 230 / 400 - 1 Figure 11-15 Figure 11-26 Figure 11-37 Figure 11-48 with testhead 05FFigure
on page 11-36 on page 11-47 on page 11-58 on 11-61 on
page 11-69, page 11-83
Figure 11-50
on page 11-71
05K 240 / 415 - 1 Figure 11-15 Figure 11-26 Figure 11-37 Figure 11-48 with testhead 05J Figure
on page 11-36 on page 11-47 on page 11-58 on 11-61 on
page 11-69, page 11-83
Figure 11-50
on page 11-71

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-25


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Table 11-8 Power option wiring cross-reference (single-phase) (continued)

L-N Voltage/
Power L-L Voltage -
Power Configuration Option Phases Testhead
Single-Phase Earthed 05M 220 - 1 Figure 11-17 Figure 11-28 Figure 11-39 Figure 11-55 Figure 11-57 Figure 11-61
on page 11-38 on page 11-49 on page 11-60 on page 11-76 on page 11-78 on page 11-83
L1
05F 230 - 1 Figure 11-17 Figure 11-28 Figure 11-39 Figure 11-55 Figure 11-57 Figure 11-61
on page 11-38 on page 11-49 on page 11-60 on page 11-76 on page 11-78 on page 11-83
05J 240 - 1 Figure 11-17 Figure 11-28 Figure 11-39 Figure 11-55 Figure 11-57 Figure 11-61
on page 11-38 on page 11-49 on page 11-60 on page 11-76 on page 11-78 on page 11-83
N
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-26


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Table 11-8 Power option wiring cross-reference (single-phase) (continued)

L-N Voltage/
Power L-L Voltage -
Power Configuration Option Phases Testhead
Outlet locations 327X 79000 317X 307X Support Bay Telecom
Figure 11-8 Figure 11-19 Figure 11-30 Figure 11-41 Outlet Bays E1085A
on page 11-29 on page 11-40 on page 11-51 on page 11-62 Location POTS or
1-PDU Figure E2195A xDSL
11-41 on Figure 11-58
page 11-62 on page 11-80
2-PDU Figure
11-51 on
page 11-72
Single-Phase AWX 200 - 1 Figure 11-13 Figure 11-24 Figure 11-35 Figure 11-52 Figure 11-54 AWY Figure
Non-Earthed on page 11-34 on page 11-45 on page 11-56 on page 11-73 on page 11-75 11-60 on
page 11-82
L1
0EB 220 - 1 Figure 11-13 Figure 11-24 Figure 11-35 Figure 11-52 Figure 11-52 0E3 Figure
on page 11-34 on page 11-45 on page 11-56 on page 11-73 on page 11-73 11-60 on
page 11-82
0EJ 230 - 1 Figure 11-13 Figure 11-24 Figure 11-35 Figure 11-52 Figure 11-52 0EG Figure
L2 on page 11-34 on page 11-45 on page 11-56 on page 11-73 on page 11-73 11-60 on
G page 11-82
0EC 240 - 1 Figure 11-13 Figure 11-24 Figure 11-35 Figure 11-52 Figure 11-52 0EH Figure
on page 11-34 on page 11-45 on page 11-56 on page 11-73 on page 11-73 11-60 on
page 11-82

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-27


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Table 11-8 Power option wiring cross-reference (single-phase) (continued)

L-N Voltage/
Power L-L Voltage -
Power Configuration Option Phases Testhead
Single-Phase Center-Tap AWY 100 / 200 - 1 Figure 11-13 Figure 11-24 Figure 11-35 Figure 11-52 Figure 11-52 Figure 11-60
Neutral on page 11-34 on page 11-45 on page 11-56 on page 11-73 on page 11-73 on page 11-82
L1 0E3 110 / 220 - 1 Figure 11-13 Figure 11-24 Figure 11-35 Figure 11-52 Figure 11-52 Figure 11-60
on page 11-34 on page 11-45 on page 11-56 on page 11-73 on page 11-73 on page 11-82

N 0EG 115 / 230 - 1 Figure 11-13 Figure 11-24 Figure 11-35 Figure 11-52 Figure 11-52 Figure 11-60
on page 11-34 on page 11-45 on page 11-56 on page 11-73 on page 11-73 on page 11-82
L2 0EH 120 / 240 - 1 Figure 11-13 Figure 11-24 Figure 11-35 Figure 11-52 Figure 11-52 Figure 11-60
on page 11-34 on page 11-45 on page 11-56 on page 11-73 on page 11-73 on page 11-82
G

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-28


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

327X 1-Module System AC Outlets

Figure 11-8 327X 1-module system AC outlets

Outlet 2 Outlet 3

Outlet 1

Testhead (Rear View)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-29


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-9 327X 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H 0E6

CHECK COUNTRY CODE


FOR FREQUENCY

T1 T2 T3

327xLLL.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-30


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-10 327X 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H 0E6

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-31


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-11 327X 0E5, 05L, 0E7

T1 T2 T3

327xLLLN.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-32


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-12 327X 0E5, 05L, 0E7

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-33


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-13 327X AWX, AWY, AWV,AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH

T1 T2 T3

327xLL.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-34


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-14 327X AWX, AWY, AWV,AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-35


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-15 327X 05B, 05G, 05K

T1 T2 T3

327xLLN.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-36


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-16 327X 05B, 05G, 05K

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-37


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-17 327X 05M, 05F, 05J

T1 T2 T3

327xLN.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-38
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-18 327X 05M, 05F, 05J

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-39


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

79000 1-Module System AC Outlets

Figure 11-19 79000 1-Module System

Outlet 2

Outlet 1
Outlet 3

Testhead (Rear View) E2190_ol.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-40


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-20 79000 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6

Unswitched 79LLL.wpg
(Fused)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-41


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-21 79000 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-42


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-22 79000 0E5, 05L, 0E7

Unswitched 79LLLN.wpg
(Fused)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-43


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-23 79000 0E5, 05L, 0E7

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-44


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-24 79000 AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH

T1 T2 T3

79KLL.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-45
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-25 79000 AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-46


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-26 79000 05B, 05G, 05K

T1 T2 T3

79KLLN.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-47


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-27 79000 05B, 05G, 05K

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-48


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-28 79000 05M, 05F, 05J

79KLN.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-49


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-29 79000 05M, 05F, 05J

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-50


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

317X 2-Module System AC Outlets

Figure 11-30 317X 2-module system

Outlet 0 Outlet 2

Outlet 1 Outlet 3

Testhead (Rear View)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-51


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-31 317X 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6

T1 T2 T3

317xLLL.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-52
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-32 317X 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-53


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-33 317X 0E5, 05L, 0E7

T1 T2 T3

317xLLLN.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-54
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-34 317X 0E5, 05L, 0E7

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-55


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-35 317X AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH

T1 T2 T3

317xLL.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-56


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-36 317X AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-57


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-37 317X 05B, 05G, 05K

T1 T2 T3

317xLLN.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-58


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-38 317X 05B, 05G, 05K

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-59


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-39 317X 05M, 05F, 05J

T1 T2 T3

317xLN.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-60


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-40 317X 05M, 05F, 05J

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-61


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

307X 4-Module 1-PDU System AC Outlets

Figure 11-41 307X 4-module 1-PDU system

Outlet 0 Outlet 2

Outlet 1 Outlet 3

Support Bay Testhead (Rear View)


(Rear View)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-62


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-42 3070 1-PDU 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H,0E6

T1 T2 T3

3070LLL_1.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-63


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-43 3070 1-PDU 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H,0E6

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-64


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-44 3070 1-PDU 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6

3070LLL_2.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-65


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-45 3070 1-PDU 0E5, 05L,0E7

T1 T2 T3

3070LLLN_1.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-66


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-46 3070 1-PDU 0E5, 05L,0E7

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-67


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-47 3070 1-PDU 0E5, 05L, 0E7

3070LLLN_2.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-68


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-48 3070 1-PDU 05B, 05G, 05K

T1 T2 T3

3070LLN_1.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-69


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-49 3070 1-PDU 05B, 05G, 05K

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-70


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-50 3070 1-PDU 05B, 05G, 05K

3070LLN_2.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-71


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

307X 4-Module 2-PDU System AC Outlets Since each of these options are single-phase, which
outlet a DUT power supply connects to does not affect
Beginning with the release of Series 3, with 4-module the load balance, but knowing where each power supply
2-PDU systems, the DUT power supplies are connected is plugged in helps when servicing the system.
directly to the E1135C PDU, and there are no outlet
boxes in the support bay, as shown in Figure 11-51.

Figure 11-51 307X 4-module 2-PDU system

Outlet 0 Outlet 2
8 7 6 5
See Table
To Gnd

4 3 2 1
See Table

See Table
Main
To Gnd
See Table

Branch
Outlet 1 Outlet 3
PDU
Support Bay Testhead (Rear View)
(Rear View)

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-72


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-52 3070 2-PDU AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0E3, 0EJ,0EG, 0EC, 0EH

T1 T2 T3

3070LL_1.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-73


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-53 3070 2-PDU AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0E3, 0EJ,0EG, 0EC, 0EH

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-74


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-54 3070 2-PDU AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0E3, 0EJ, 0EG, 0EC, 0EH

T1 T2 T3

CHECK COUNTRY CODE


FOR FREQUENCY

3070LL_2.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-75


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-55 3070 2-PDU 05M, 05F, 05J

T1 T2 T3

3070LN_1.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-76


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-56 3070 2-PDU 05M, 05F, 05J

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-77


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-57 3070 2-PDU 05M, 05F, 05J

T1 T2 T3

3070LN_2.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-78


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

E1085 POTS Bay and E2195 xDSL Bay AC Outlets


When the E1135C was introduced, the wiring of the
E1085A POTS bay was modified by plugging the
instruments in the POTS bay, except the Kikusui power
supply, directly into the PDU. See the Telecom Theory
and Repair Manual, Chapter 4, for additional
information.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-79


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-58 E1085A POTS / E2195A xDSL Bay with E1135C PDU

Outlet 1 - Customer Instruments

8 7 6 5
See Table
To Gnd
See Table
4 3 2 1
See Table
To Gnd
See Table

PDU

Line Mains
Filter Input

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-80


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-59 E1085A POTS / E2195A xDSL AWW, 05E

120/127 Volt External Instrum ents


E1085-E2195LLLN.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-81


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-60 E1085A POTS / E2195A xDSL AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH

100/127 Volt External Instruments


E1085-E2195LLN.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-82


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-61 E1085A POTS / E2195A xDSL 05M, 05F, 05J

220/240 Volt External Instruments


E1085-E2195LN.wpg

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-83


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Reconnect the PDU to the Mains Complete the Conversion


After the outlets are connected to the PDU(s) per the After verifying that the 3070 / 79000 and xDSL/POTS
appropriate load balancing diagram, have the electrician bay passes diagnostics, complete the conversion:
re-connect the PDU to the mains. Refer to Chapter 6 to
1 Route the cables neatly and secure them using cable
determine the appropriate wire size and breaker size. If
ties where strain relief will be helpful.
the mains supply is larger than 10 square millimeters (#8
AWG), see the section Connecting a Pigtail to the 2 Replace the covers on both the 3070 / 79000 testhead
E1135C PDU. and xDSL/POTS bay.
After the PDU has been connected to the mains and 3 Cross out the old FLA value on the back of the
powered, measure that the outlets match the voltage E1135C and write in the new FLA value from the
shown in the appropriate diagram. If they do NOT appropriate table in Chapter 6.
match, fix the wiring error before proceeding to the next
step and retest to verify that the power to each outlet is NOTE
correct.
This current reduction conversion procedure is
NOT a warranty cost item. MTD does not
Reconnect the Loads recognize it as a problem, but it does offer the
After turning off the PDU On/Off switch, using the opportunity for the customer to reduce their power
appropriate wiring diagram, reconnect the loads as consumption.
indicated. This will provide correct load balancing on
each phase. Be sure to plug in the DUT power supplies,
STC power supplies, fan power and all other Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU
connections in the outlets designated for that purpose. The E1135C PDU is the replacement for the E1131A,
and E1135A/B PDUs. The input terminals on the
Verify the System E1135C on the mains disconnect switch easily fit wire
size 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG). It is strongly
Use full diagnostics to verify that the system is
suggested that if the recommended wire size is greater
functional. See the Repair I Manual, Chapter 2 for
than 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG), that short power
more information about diagnostics.
cord, 450 millimeters (18-inches) to 609 millimeters
(24-inches), called a pigtail be created using 10 square
millimeters (#8 AWG) wire, and the recommended
larger wire size cable be connected to the receptacle
which connects to the pigtail, as shown in Figure 11-62.

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-84


Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure

Figure 11-62 Using a pigtail with the E1135C PDU

AC Source V oltage

3070 System
Pigtail

PD U

Circuit
Breaker
or Fuses
Power
Receptac le

Added P ow er Receptac le on a short pigtail if the


E1135C PD U is used and the existing conductor
size of the pow er drop exceeds 10 2 mm (#8 A WG).
Pigtail.wp g

© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-85


03066-90114 Rev. Z Printed in USA
06/2002

You might also like